Annotation of gforth/doc/texinfo.tex, revision 1.4
1.2 anton 1: % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
2: %
1.3 anton 3: % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4: \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
5: %
1.4 ! anton 6: \def\texinfoversion{2002-03-26.08}
1.3 anton 7: %
1.4 ! anton 8: % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99,
! 9: % 2000, 01, 02 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
1.2 anton 10: %
11: % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
12: % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
13: % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
14: % your option) any later version.
15: %
16: % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
17: % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
18: % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
19: % General Public License for more details.
20: %
21: % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
22: % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
23: % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
24: % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
25: %
26: % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
27: % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
28: % what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
29: %
30: % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
31: % reports; you can get the latest version from:
1.3 anton 32: % ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
1.4 ! anton 33: % (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
! 34: % ftp://texinfo.org/texinfo/texinfo.tex
! 35: % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
! 36: % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
! 37: % and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
! 38: %
1.3 anton 39: % The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
40: % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
1.4 ! anton 41: %
! 42: % Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/ and also
! 43: % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
1.3 anton 44: %
45: % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
46: % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
47: % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
48: %
49: % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
50: % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
51: % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
52: % tex foo.texi
53: % texindex foo.??
54: % tex foo.texi
55: % tex foo.texi
1.4 ! anton 56: % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
! 57: % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
1.3 anton 58: % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
59: % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
60: %
61: % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages. You can get
1.4 ! anton 62: % the existing language-specific files from the full Texinfo distribution.
1.1 anton 63:
1.3 anton 64: \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
1.1 anton 65:
66: % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
67: % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
68: % they might have appeared in the input file name.
1.3 anton 69: \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
1.1 anton 70: \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
71:
72: % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
73: \let\ptexb=\b
74: \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
75: \let\ptexc=\c
76: \let\ptexcomma=\,
77: \let\ptexdot=\.
78: \let\ptexdots=\dots
79: \let\ptexend=\end
1.2 anton 80: \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
81: \let\ptexexclam=\!
1.1 anton 82: \let\ptexi=\i
83: \let\ptexlbrace=\{
84: \let\ptexrbrace=\}
85: \let\ptexstar=\*
86: \let\ptext=\t
87:
1.3 anton 88: % We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
89: % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
90: \let\+ = \relax
1.1 anton 91:
92: \message{Basics,}
93: \chardef\other=12
94:
95: % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
96: % starts a new line in the output.
97: \newlinechar = `^^J
98:
1.3 anton 99: % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
100: \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
101: \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
102: \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
103: \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
104: \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
105: \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
106: \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
107: \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
108: \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
109: \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
110: \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
111: \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
112: \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
113: \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
114: \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
115: \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
116: \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
117: \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
118: \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
119: %
120: \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
121: \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
122: \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
123: \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
124: \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
125: \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
126: \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
127: \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
128: \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
129: \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
130: \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
131: \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
132: %
133: \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
134: \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
135: \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
136: \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
137: \ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
138: \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
139: \ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
1.1 anton 140:
141: % Ignore a token.
142: %
143: \def\gobble#1{}
144:
145: \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
146: \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
147: \hyphenation{eshell}
1.2 anton 148: \hyphenation{white-space}
1.1 anton 149:
150: % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
1.2 anton 151: \newdimen \bindingoffset
152: \newdimen \normaloffset
1.1 anton 153: \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
154:
155: % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
156: % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
157: % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
158: %
159: \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
1.3 anton 160: \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
1.1 anton 161: \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
162: \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
163: \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
164: \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
165: }%
1.3 anton 166: \else
167: \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
168: \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
169: \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
170: \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
171: \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
172: \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
173: }%
174: \fi
1.1 anton 175:
1.4 ! anton 176: % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
! 177: % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
! 178: %
! 179: \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
! 180: \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
! 181: \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
! 182: \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
! 183: \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
! 184: \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
! 185:
1.2 anton 186: % For @cropmarks command.
187: % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
1.3 anton 188: %
1.2 anton 189: \newif\ifcropmarks
190: \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
1.1 anton 191: %
1.2 anton 192: % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
193: % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
1.1 anton 194: %
1.3 anton 195: \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
196: \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
197: \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
198: \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
1.2 anton 199:
200: % Main output routine.
201: \chardef\PAGE = 255
202: \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
203:
204: \newbox\headlinebox
205: \newbox\footlinebox
1.1 anton 206:
207: % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
208: % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
209: \def\onepageout#1{%
1.2 anton 210: \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
211: %
1.1 anton 212: \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
213: \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
1.2 anton 214: %
215: % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
216: % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
217: \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
218: \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
219: %
1.1 anton 220: {%
1.2 anton 221: % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
222: % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
223: % before the \shipout runs.
224: %
225: \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
226: \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
227: \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
228: % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
1.1 anton 229: \shipout\vbox{%
1.4 ! anton 230: % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
! 231: \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
! 232: %
1.2 anton 233: \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
234: \hsize = \outerhsize
1.3 anton 235: \vskip-\topandbottommargin
236: \vtop to0pt{%
237: \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
238: \nointerlineskip
239: \line{%
240: \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
241: \hfill
242: \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
243: }%
244: \vss}%
1.2 anton 245: \vskip\topandbottommargin
246: \line\bgroup
247: \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
248: \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
249: \vbox\bgroup
250: \fi
251: %
252: \unvbox\headlinebox
1.1 anton 253: \pagebody{#1}%
1.2 anton 254: \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
255: % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
256: % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
257: % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
258: \vskip 2\baselineskip
259: \unvbox\footlinebox
260: \fi
261: %
262: \ifcropmarks
263: \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
264: \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
265: \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
266: \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
1.3 anton 267: \vbox to0pt{\vss
268: \line{%
269: \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
270: \hfill
271: \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
272: }%
273: \nointerlineskip
274: \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
1.2 anton 275: }%
276: \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
277: \fi
278: }% end of \shipout\vbox
279: }% end of group with \turnoffactive
1.1 anton 280: \advancepageno
281: \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
282: }
283:
284: \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
285:
286: \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
287: {\catcode`\@ =11
288: \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
289: % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
290: \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
291: \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
292: \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
293: \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
294: \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
295: }
296:
297: % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
298: % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
299: % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
300: %
301: \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
302: \def\nstop{\vbox
303: {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
304: \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
305: \def\nsbot{\vbox
306: {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
307:
308: % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
309: % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
310: % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
311: %
312: \def\parsearg#1{%
313: \let\next = #1%
314: \begingroup
315: \obeylines
316: \futurelet\temp\parseargx
317: }
318:
319: % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
320: % the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
321: \def\parseargx{%
322: % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
323: \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
324: \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
325: \else
326: \expandafter\parseargline
327: \fi
328: }
329:
330: % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
331: {\obeyspaces %
332: \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
333:
334: {\obeylines %
335: \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
336: \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
337: %
338: % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
339: % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
340: \argremovec #1\c\relax %
341: \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
342: %
343: % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
344: \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
345: }%
346: }
347:
348: % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
349: % do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
350: % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
351: % just to delimit the argument to the \c.
352: \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
353: \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
354:
355: % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
356: % @end itemize @c foo
357: % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
358: % `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
359: % result to \toks0.
360: %
361: % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
362: % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
363: % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
364: % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
365: % here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
366: % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
367: % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
368: %
369: \def\removeactivespaces#1{%
370: \begingroup
371: \ignoreactivespaces
372: \edef\temp{#1}%
373: \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
374: \endgroup
375: }
376:
377: % Change the active space to expand to nothing.
378: %
379: \begingroup
380: \obeyspaces
381: \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
382: \endgroup
383:
384:
385: \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
386:
387: %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
388: %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
389: \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
390: \def\ENVcheck{%
1.3 anton 391: \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
1.1 anton 392: \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
393:
394: % @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
1.3 anton 395: \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
1.1 anton 396:
397: \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
398:
399: \def\beginxxx #1{%
400: \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
401: {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
402: \csname #1\endcsname\fi}
403:
404: % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
405: %
406: \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
407: \def\endxxx #1{%
408: \removeactivespaces{#1}%
409: \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
410: %
411: \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
412: \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
413: % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
414: \errhelp = \EMsimple
415: \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
416: \else
417: \unmatchedenderror\endthing
418: \fi
419: \else
420: % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
421: \csname E\endthing\endcsname
422: \fi
423: }
424:
425: % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
426: %
427: \def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
428: \errhelp = \EMsimple
429: \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
430: }
431:
432: % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
433: %
434: \def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
435: \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
436: }
437:
438:
439: % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
440: % \nonfillstart and \quotations).
441: \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
442: \def\singlespace{%
443: % Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below
444: % environments. --karl, 6may93
445: %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
446: %\kern \baselineskip}%
1.4 ! anton 447: \setleading\singlespaceskip
1.1 anton 448: }
449:
450: %% Simple single-character @ commands
451:
452: % @@ prints an @
453: % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
1.3 anton 454: \def\@{{\tt\char64}}
1.1 anton 455:
456: % This is turned off because it was never documented
457: % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
458: %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
459: %% but suppressing ligatures.
460: %\def\`{{`}}
461: %\def\'{{'}}
462:
463: % Used to generate quoted braces.
1.3 anton 464: \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
465: \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
1.1 anton 466: \let\{=\mylbrace
467: \let\}=\myrbrace
468: \begingroup
469: % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
470: \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
471: \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
472: \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
473: @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
474: @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
475: @endgroup
476:
477: % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
478: % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
479: \let\, = \c
480: \let\dotaccent = \.
481: \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
482: \let\tieaccent = \t
483: \let\ubaraccent = \b
484: \let\udotaccent = \d
485:
486: % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
487: % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
488: \def\questiondown{?`}
489: \def\exclamdown{!`}
490:
491: % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
492: \def\imacro{i}
493: \def\jmacro{j}
494: \def\dotless#1{%
495: \def\temp{#1}%
496: \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
497: \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
498: \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
499: \fi\fi
500: }
501:
1.3 anton 502: % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
503: % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
504: % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
505: % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
506: % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
507: {\catcode`@ = 11
508: % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
509: % if the definition is written into an index file.
510: \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
511: \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
512: }
513:
1.1 anton 514: % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
515: \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
516:
517: % @* forces a line break.
518: \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
519:
520: % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
521: \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
522:
523: % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
1.2 anton 524: \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
1.1 anton 525:
526: % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
1.2 anton 527: \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
1.1 anton 528:
529: % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
530: % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
531: % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
532: \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
533:
534: % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
535: % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
536: % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
537: % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
538: % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
539: % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
540: % the text is small, which looks bad.
541: %
542: \def\group{\begingroup
543: \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
544: \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
545: \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
546: \fi
547: %
548: % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
549: % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
550: % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
551: % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
552: % above. But it's pretty close.
553: \def\Egroup{%
554: \egroup % End the \vtop.
555: \endgroup % End the \group.
556: }%
557: %
558: \vtop\bgroup
559: % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
560: % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
561: % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
562: % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
563: % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
564: % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
565: \everypar = {\strut}%
566: %
567: % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
568: % normal interline spacing.
569: \offinterlineskip
570: %
571: % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
572: % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
573: % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
574: % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
575: % empty paragraph.
576: \ifx\par\lisppar
577: \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
578: %
579: % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
580: \obeylines
581: \fi
582: %
583: % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
584: % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
585: % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
586: % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
587: % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
588: % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
589: \comment
590: }
591: %
592: % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
593: % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
594: %
595: \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
596: group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
597: where each line of input produces a line of output.}
598:
599: % @need space-in-mils
600: % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
601:
602: \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
603:
604: \def\need{\parsearg\needx}
605:
606: % Old definition--didn't work.
607: %\def\needx #1{\par %
608: %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
609: %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
610: %{\baselineskip=0pt%
1.3 anton 611: %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
1.1 anton 612: %\prevdepth=-1000pt
613: %}}
614:
615: \def\needx#1{%
1.3 anton 616: % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
1.1 anton 617: % paragraph.
618: \par
619: %
1.3 anton 620: % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
621: \dimen0 = #1\mil
622: \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
623: \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
624: \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
625: %
626: % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
627: % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
628: % And a page break here is fine.
629: \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
630: %
631: % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
632: % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
633: % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
634: % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
635: % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
636: %
637: % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
638: % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
639: % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
640: % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
641: % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
642: % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
643: % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
644: \penalty9999
645: %
646: % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
647: \kern -#1\mil
648: %
649: % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
650: \nobreak
651: \fi
1.1 anton 652: }
653:
654: % @br forces paragraph break
655:
656: \let\br = \par
657:
1.2 anton 658: % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
659: % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
660: % font as three actual period characters.
661: %
1.3 anton 662: \def\dots{%
663: \leavevmode
664: \hbox to 1.5em{%
665: \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
666: .\hss.\hss.%
667: \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
668: }%
669: }
1.2 anton 670:
671: % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
1.3 anton 672: %
1.2 anton 673: \def\enddots{%
1.3 anton 674: \leavevmode
1.2 anton 675: \hbox to 2em{%
676: \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
677: .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
678: \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
679: }%
680: \spacefactor=3000
681: }
1.1 anton 682:
683:
684: % @page forces the start of a new page
1.3 anton 685: %
1.1 anton 686: \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
687:
688: % @exdent text....
689: % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
690:
691: % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
692: % That's how much \exdent should take out.
693: \newskip\exdentamount
694:
695: % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
696: \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
697: \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
698:
699: % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
700: \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
701: \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
702: \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
703:
1.4 ! anton 704: % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
! 705: % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
! 706: % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
! 707: %
1.1 anton 708: \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
709: \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
1.4 ! anton 710: %
! 711: \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
! 712: \nobreak
! 713: \kern-\strutdepth
! 714: \vtop to \strutdepth{%
! 715: \baselineskip=\strutdepth
! 716: \vss
! 717: % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
! 718: % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
! 719: \ifx#1l%
! 720: \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
! 721: \else
! 722: \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
! 723: \fi
! 724: \null
! 725: }%
! 726: }}
! 727: \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
! 728: \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
! 729: %
! 730: % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
! 731: % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
! 732: % else use TEXT for both).
! 733: %
! 734: \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
! 735: \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
! 736: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
! 737: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
! 738: \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
! 739: \def\righttext{#2}%
! 740: \else
! 741: \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
! 742: \def\righttext{#1}%
! 743: \fi
! 744: %
! 745: \ifodd\pageno
! 746: \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
! 747: \else
! 748: \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
! 749: \fi
! 750: \temp
! 751: }
1.1 anton 752:
753: % @include file insert text of that file as input.
754: % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
755: \def\include{\begingroup
756: \catcode`\\=12
757: \catcode`~=12
758: \catcode`^=12
759: \catcode`_=12
760: \catcode`|=12
761: \catcode`<=12
762: \catcode`>=12
763: \catcode`+=12
764: \parsearg\includezzz}
765: % Restore active chars for included file.
766: \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
767: % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
768: \def\thisfile{#1}%
769: \input\thisfile
770: \endgroup}
771:
772: \def\thisfile{}
773:
774: % @center line outputs that line, centered
775:
776: \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
777: \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
778: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
779: \centerline{#1}}}
780:
781: % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
782:
783: \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
784: \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
785:
786: % @comment ...line which is ignored...
787: % @c is the same as @comment
788: % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
789:
1.3 anton 790: \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
791: \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
792: \commentxxx}
793: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
1.1 anton 794:
795: \let\c=\comment
796:
1.3 anton 797: % @paragraphindent NCHARS
798: % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
799: % We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
800: %
801: \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
802: \def\noneword{none}
803: %
804: \def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
805: \def\doparagraphindent#1{%
806: \def\temp{#1}%
807: \ifx\temp\asisword
808: \else
809: \ifx\temp\noneword
810: \defaultparindent = 0pt
811: \else
812: \defaultparindent = #1em
813: \fi
814: \fi
815: \parindent = \defaultparindent
816: }
1.1 anton 817:
1.3 anton 818: % @exampleindent NCHARS
819: % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
820: % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
821: % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
822: \def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
823: \def\doexampleindent#1{%
824: \def\temp{#1}%
825: \ifx\temp\asisword
826: \else
827: \ifx\temp\noneword
828: \lispnarrowing = 0pt
829: \else
830: \lispnarrowing = #1em
831: \fi
832: \fi
1.1 anton 833: }
834:
1.3 anton 835: % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
1.1 anton 836: %
1.3 anton 837: \def\asis#1{#1}
1.1 anton 838:
1.4 ! anton 839: % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
! 840: % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
! 841: % to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
! 842: % superscripts, special math chars, etc.
! 843: %
! 844: % @math does not do math typesetting in section titles, index
! 845: % entries, and other such contexts where the catcodes are set before
! 846: % @math gets a chance to work. This could perhaps be fixed, but for now
! 847: % at least we can have real math in the main text, where it's needed most.
! 848: %
! 849: \let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
! 850: %
! 851: % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
! 852: % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
! 853: % _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
! 854: % if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
! 855: %
! 856: {\catcode95 = \active % 95 = _
! 857: \gdef\mathunderscore{%
! 858: \catcode95=\active
! 859: \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
! 860: }}
1.3 anton 861: %
1.4 ! anton 862: % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
! 863: % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
! 864: % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
! 865: % otherwise define @\.
! 866: %
! 867: % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
! 868: \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
1.1 anton 869: %
1.4 ! anton 870: \def\math{%
! 871: \tex
! 872: \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
! 873: \let\\ = \mathbackslash
! 874: \implicitmath\finishmath}
! 875: \def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
1.1 anton 876:
1.3 anton 877: % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
878: \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
879: \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
1.1 anton 880:
1.3 anton 881: % @refill is a no-op.
882: \let\refill=\relax
1.1 anton 883:
1.3 anton 884: % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
885: % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
886: % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
887: %
888: \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
889: \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
1.1 anton 890:
1.3 anton 891: % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
892: % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
893: % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
894: \def\setfilename{%
895: \iflinks
896: \readauxfile
897: \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
898: \openindices
899: \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
900: \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
901: %
902: % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
903: % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
904: % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
905: \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
906: \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
907: \closein1
908: \temp
909: %
910: \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
911: }
1.1 anton 912:
1.3 anton 913: % Called from \setfilename.
1.1 anton 914: %
1.3 anton 915: \def\openindices{%
916: \newindex{cp}%
917: \newcodeindex{fn}%
918: \newcodeindex{vr}%
919: \newcodeindex{tp}%
920: \newcodeindex{ky}%
921: \newcodeindex{pg}%
1.1 anton 922: }
923:
1.3 anton 924: % @bye.
925: \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
926:
1.1 anton 927:
1.3 anton 928: \message{pdf,}
929: % adobe `portable' document format
930: \newcount\tempnum
931: \newcount\lnkcount
932: \newtoks\filename
933: \newcount\filenamelength
934: \newcount\pgn
935: \newtoks\toksA
936: \newtoks\toksB
937: \newtoks\toksC
938: \newtoks\toksD
939: \newbox\boxA
940: \newcount\countA
941: \newif\ifpdf
942: \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
943:
944: \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
945: \pdffalse
946: \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
947: \let\pdfurl = \gobble
948: \let\endlink = \relax
949: \let\linkcolor = \relax
950: \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
951: \else
952: \pdftrue
953: \pdfoutput = 1
954: \input pdfcolor
955: \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
956: \def\imagewidth{#2}%
957: \def\imageheight{#3}%
1.4 ! anton 958: % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
! 959: % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1.3 anton 960: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1.4 ! anton 961: \immediate\pdfimage
1.3 anton 962: \else
1.4 ! anton 963: \immediate\pdfximage
1.3 anton 964: \fi
965: \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
966: \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
1.4 ! anton 967: \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
! 968: #1.pdf%
! 969: \else
! 970: {#1.pdf}%
! 971: \fi
1.3 anton 972: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
973: \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
974: \fi}
1.4 ! anton 975: \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
! 976: \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
! 977: \let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light?
1.3 anton 978: \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
979: % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
980: % come from Petr Olsak
981: \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
982: \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
983: \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
984: \advance\tempnum by1
985: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
986: \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
987: \openin 1 \jobname.toc
1.4 ! anton 988: \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
1.3 anton 989: \closein 1
990: \indexnofonts
991: \def\tt{}
1.4 ! anton 992: \let\_ = \normalunderscore
! 993: % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
1.3 anton 994: \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
995: \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
996: %
997: \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
1.4 ! anton 998: \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
1.3 anton 999: \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
1000: \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
1.4 ! anton 1001: \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
1.3 anton 1002: \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
1.4 ! anton 1003: \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
1.3 anton 1004: \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
1.4 ! anton 1005: \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
1.3 anton 1006: \input \jobname.toc
1007: \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
1008: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
1.4 ! anton 1009: \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
1.3 anton 1010: \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
1011: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
1012: \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
1013: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
1.4 ! anton 1014: \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{%
! 1015: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}{##1}}
1.3 anton 1016: \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
1017: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
1.4 ! anton 1018: \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{%
! 1019: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}{##1}}
1.3 anton 1020: \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
1021: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
1.4 ! anton 1022: \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
! 1023: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}{##1}}
1.3 anton 1024: \input \jobname.toc
1.4 ! anton 1025: \endgroup\fi
1.3 anton 1026: }}
1027: \def\makelinks #1,{%
1028: \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
1029: \ifx\params\E
1030: \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
1031: \else
1032: \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
1033: \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
1034: \picknum{#1}%
1035: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
1036: goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
1037: \linkcolor #1%
1038: \advance\lnkcount by 1%
1039: \endlink
1040: \fi
1041: \nextmakelinks
1042: }
1043: \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
1044: \def\pn#1{%
1045: \def\p{#1}%
1046: \ifx\p\lbrace
1047: \let\nextpn=\ppn
1048: \else
1049: \let\nextpn=\ppnn
1050: \def\first{#1}
1051: \fi
1052: \nextpn
1053: }
1054: \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
1055: \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
1056: \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
1057: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1058: \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1059: \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1060: \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1061: \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1062: \advance\filenamelength by 1
1063: \fi
1.1 anton 1064: \fi
1.3 anton 1065: \nextsp}
1066: \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
1067: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1068: \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1069: \else
1070: \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1071: \fi
1072: \def\pdfurl#1{%
1073: \begingroup
1074: \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
1.4 ! anton 1075: \let\value=\expandablevalue
1.3 anton 1076: \leavevmode\Red
1077: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1078: user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1079: % #1
1080: \endgroup}
1081: \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1082: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1083: \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1084: \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1085: \def\maketoks{%
1086: \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
1087: \ifx\first0\adn0
1088: \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1089: \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1090: \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1091: \else
1092: \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1093: \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1094: \let\next=\maketoks
1095: \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1096: \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1097: \fi
1098: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1099: \next}
1100: \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1101: {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1102: \def\pdflink#1{%
1.4 ! anton 1103: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1.3 anton 1104: \linkcolor #1\endlink}
1105: \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1106: \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
1107:
1108:
1109: \message{fonts,}
1110: % Font-change commands.
1111:
1112: % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1113: % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
1114: \newfam\sffam
1115: \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
1116: \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1117:
1118: % We don't need math for this one.
1119: \def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
1.1 anton 1120:
1.4 ! anton 1121: % Default leading.
! 1122: \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
! 1123:
! 1124: % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
! 1125: % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
! 1126: % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
! 1127: %
! 1128: \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
! 1129: \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
! 1130: \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
! 1131: %
! 1132: \def\setleading#1{%
! 1133: \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
! 1134: \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
! 1135: \normalbaselines
! 1136: \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
! 1137: \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
! 1138: depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
! 1139: }%
! 1140: }
1.1 anton 1141:
1.3 anton 1142: % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
1.1 anton 1143: % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
1144: % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
1145: \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
1146:
1147: % Use cm as the default font prefix.
1148: % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1149: % before you read in texinfo.tex.
1150: \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
1151: \def\fontprefix{cm}
1152: \fi
1153: % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1154: \def\rmshape{r}
1155: \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
1156: \def\bfshape{b}
1157: \def\bxshape{bx}
1158: \def\ttshape{tt}
1159: \def\ttbshape{tt}
1160: \def\ttslshape{sltt}
1161: \def\itshape{ti}
1162: \def\itbshape{bxti}
1163: \def\slshape{sl}
1164: \def\slbshape{bxsl}
1165: \def\sfshape{ss}
1166: \def\sfbshape{ss}
1167: \def\scshape{csc}
1168: \def\scbshape{csc}
1169:
1.4 ! anton 1170: \newcount\mainmagstep
1.1 anton 1171: \ifx\bigger\relax
1.4 ! anton 1172: % not really supported.
! 1173: \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
! 1174: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
! 1175: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
1.1 anton 1176: \else
1.4 ! anton 1177: \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
! 1178: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
! 1179: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1.1 anton 1180: \fi
1181: % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
1182: % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
1183: % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
1184: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1185: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1186: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1187: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1188: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1189: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1190: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1191: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1192:
1193: % A few fonts for @defun, etc.
1194: \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
1195: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
1196: \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
1197:
1.3 anton 1198: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1199: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
1200: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
1201: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
1202: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
1203: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
1204: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
1205: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
1206: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
1207: \font\smalli=cmmi9
1208: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
1.1 anton 1209:
1.4 ! anton 1210: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
! 1211: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
! 1212: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
! 1213: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
! 1214: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
! 1215: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
! 1216: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
! 1217: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
! 1218: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
! 1219: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
! 1220: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
! 1221:
1.2 anton 1222: % Fonts for title page:
1223: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1224: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1225: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1226: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1227: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
1228: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
1229: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
1230: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1231: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1232: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1233: \def\authorrm{\secrm}
1234:
1.1 anton 1235: % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
1236: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1237: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1238: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1239: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1240: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
1.2 anton 1241: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
1.1 anton 1242: \let\chapbf=\chaprm
1243: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1244: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
1245: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
1246:
1247: % Section fonts (14.4pt).
1248: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1249: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1250: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1251: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1252: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
1253: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1254: \let\secbf\secrm
1255: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1256: \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1257: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1258:
1259: % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
1260: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1261: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
1262: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
1263: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1.2 anton 1264: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
1.1 anton 1265: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1266: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
1267: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
1268: \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
1.2 anton 1269: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
1.1 anton 1270: % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
1271: % but that is not a standard magnification.
1272:
1273: % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
1274: % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
1.4 ! anton 1275: % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
! 1276: % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
! 1277: % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
1.1 anton 1278: %
1279: \def\resetmathfonts{%
1.4 ! anton 1280: \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
! 1281: \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
! 1282: \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
1.1 anton 1283: }
1284:
1285: % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
1286: % of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
1287: % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
1288: % cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
1289: % \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
1290: % redefine \bf itself.
1291: \def\textfonts{%
1292: \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
1293: \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
1294: \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
1.4 ! anton 1295: \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
1.2 anton 1296: \def\titlefonts{%
1297: \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
1298: \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
1299: \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
1300: \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
1301: \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
1302: \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
1.1 anton 1303: \def\chapfonts{%
1304: \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
1305: \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
1306: \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
1307: \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
1308: \def\secfonts{%
1309: \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
1310: \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
1311: \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
1312: \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
1313: \def\subsecfonts{%
1314: \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
1315: \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
1316: \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
1317: \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
1318: \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
1.3 anton 1319: \def\smallfonts{%
1320: \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
1321: \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
1322: \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
1323: \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
1.4 ! anton 1324: \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
! 1325: \def\smallerfonts{%
! 1326: \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
! 1327: \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
! 1328: \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
! 1329: \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
! 1330: \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
! 1331: \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallerfonts
1.1 anton 1332:
1333: % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
1334: %
1335: \textfonts
1336:
1.2 anton 1337: % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
1338: \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
1339: \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
1340:
1.1 anton 1341: % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
1342: \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
1343:
1344: % Fonts for short table of contents.
1345: \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
1346: \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
1347: \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
1348:
1349: %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
1350: %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
1351:
1352: % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
1353: % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
1354: \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
1.3 anton 1355: \def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1356: \def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1.1 anton 1357:
1358: \let\i=\smartitalic
1.3 anton 1359: \let\var=\smartslanted
1360: \let\dfn=\smartslanted
1.1 anton 1361: \let\emph=\smartitalic
1.3 anton 1362: \let\cite=\smartslanted
1.1 anton 1363:
1364: \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
1365: \let\strong=\b
1366:
1367: % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
1368: % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
1369: % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
1370: %
1371: \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
1372: \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
1373:
1374: \def\t#1{%
1375: {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
1376: \null
1377: }
1378: \let\ttfont=\t
1.2 anton 1379: \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
1.3 anton 1380: \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1381: \font\keysy=cmsy9
1382: \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
1.2 anton 1383: \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
1.1 anton 1384: \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
1.2 anton 1385: \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
1.1 anton 1386: \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
1.2 anton 1387: \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
1.1 anton 1388: % The old definition, with no lozenge:
1389: %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
1390: \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
1391:
1.3 anton 1392: % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
1.1 anton 1393: \let\file=\samp
1.3 anton 1394: \let\option=\samp
1.1 anton 1395:
1396: % @code is a modification of @t,
1397: % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
1398: \def\tclose#1{%
1399: {%
1400: % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
1401: \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
1402: %
1403: % Switch to typewriter.
1404: \tt
1405: %
1406: % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
1407: \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
1408: %
1409: % Turn off hyphenation.
1410: \nohyphenation
1411: %
1412: \rawbackslash
1413: \frenchspacing
1414: #1%
1415: }%
1416: \null
1417: }
1418:
1419: % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
1420: % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
1421: % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
1422:
1423: % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
1424: % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
1425: % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
1426: % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
1427: % -- rms.
1428: {
1.3 anton 1429: \catcode`\-=\active
1430: \catcode`\_=\active
1431: %
1432: \global\def\code{\begingroup
1433: \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
1434: \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
1435: \codex
1436: }
1437: %
1438: % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
1439: % just treat them as a normal -.
1440: \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
1.1 anton 1441: }
1442:
1443: \def\realdash{-}
1444: \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
1.4 ! anton 1445: \def\codeunder{%
! 1446: % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
! 1447: % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
! 1448: % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
! 1449: % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
! 1450: \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
! 1451: \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
! 1452: \else\normalunderscore \fi
! 1453: \discretionary{}{}{}}%
! 1454: {\_}%
! 1455: }
1.1 anton 1456: \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
1457:
1458: % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
1459: % then @kbd has no effect.
1.2 anton 1460:
1461: % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
1462: % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
1463: % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
1464: \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
1465: \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
1466: \def\arg{#1}%
1467: \ifx\arg\worddistinct
1468: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
1469: \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
1470: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1471: \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
1472: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1473: \fi\fi\fi
1474: }
1475: \def\worddistinct{distinct}
1476: \def\wordexample{example}
1477: \def\wordcode{code}
1478:
1479: % Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
1480: % the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
1481: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
1482:
1.1 anton 1483: \def\xkey{\key}
1484: \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
1485: \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
1.2 anton 1486: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
1487: \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
1488:
1.3 anton 1489: % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
1.2 anton 1490: \let\url=\code
1.3 anton 1491: \let\env=\code
1492: \let\command=\code
1.2 anton 1493:
1.3 anton 1494: % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
1495: % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
1496: % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
1497: % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
1498: % a hypertex \special here.
1499: %
1500: \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
1501: \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
1502: \unsepspaces
1503: \pdfurl{#1}%
1504: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1.2 anton 1505: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1.3 anton 1506: \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
1.2 anton 1507: \else
1.3 anton 1508: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1509: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1510: \ifpdf
1511: \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
1512: \else
1513: \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
1514: \fi
1515: \else
1516: \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
1517: \fi
1.2 anton 1518: \fi
1.3 anton 1519: \endlink
1520: \endgroup}
1.2 anton 1521:
1.3 anton 1522: % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
1523: % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
1524: %
1.2 anton 1525: %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
1.3 anton 1526: \ifpdf
1527: \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
1528: \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
1529: \unsepspaces
1530: \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
1531: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1532: \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
1533: \endlink
1534: \endgroup}
1535: \else
1536: \let\email=\uref
1537: \fi
1.1 anton 1538:
1539: % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
1540: % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
1541: % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
1542: % this property, we can check that font parameter.
1.2 anton 1543: %
1.1 anton 1544: \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
1545:
1546: % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
1.3 anton 1547: % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
1.1 anton 1548: %
1549: \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
1550:
1551: \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
1552:
1553: % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
1554: % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
1555: % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
1556: %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
1557:
1.3 anton 1558: % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
1.1 anton 1559: \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
1560: \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
1561: \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
1562:
1.3 anton 1563: % @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
1564: \def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
1565:
1.1 anton 1566: % @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
1567: \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
1568:
1569:
1570: \message{page headings,}
1571:
1572: \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
1573: \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
1574:
1575: % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
1576: \newif\ifseenauthor
1577: \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
1578:
1.3 anton 1579: % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
1580: % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
1581: %
1582: \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
1583: \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
1584: \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
1585: \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
1586:
1.1 anton 1587: \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
1588: \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
1589: \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
1590:
1591: \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
1592: \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
1593: \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
1594: %
1595: \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
1596: %
1597: % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
1598: \vglue\titlepagetopglue
1599: %
1600: % Now you can print the title using @title.
1601: \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
1.2 anton 1602: \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
1.1 anton 1603: % print a rule at the page bottom also.
1604: \finishedtitlepagefalse
1605: \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
1606: % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
1607: \finishedtitlepagetrue
1608: %
1609: % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
1610: \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
1611: \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
1612: %
1613: % @author should come last, but may come many times.
1614: \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
1615: \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
1616: {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
1617: %
1618: % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
1619: % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
1620: \let\oldpage = \page
1621: \def\page{%
1622: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
1623: \finishtitlepage
1624: \fi
1625: \oldpage
1626: \let\page = \oldpage
1627: \hbox{}}%
1628: % \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
1629: }
1630:
1631: \def\Etitlepage{%
1632: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
1633: \finishtitlepage
1634: \fi
1635: % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
1636: % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
1637: % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
1638: % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
1639: \oldpage
1640: \endgroup
1.3 anton 1641: %
1.4 ! anton 1642: % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
! 1643: % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
! 1644: \HEADINGSon
! 1645: %
1.3 anton 1646: % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
1647: \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
1648: \shortcontents
1649: \contents
1650: \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
1651: \global\let\contents = \relax
1652: \fi
1653: %
1654: \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
1655: \contents
1656: \global\let\contents = \relax
1657: \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
1658: \fi
1.1 anton 1659: }
1660:
1661: \def\finishtitlepage{%
1662: \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
1663: \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
1664: \finishedtitlepagetrue
1665: }
1666:
1667: %%% Set up page headings and footings.
1668:
1669: \let\thispage=\folio
1670:
1.3 anton 1671: \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
1672: \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
1673: \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
1674: \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
1.1 anton 1675:
1676: % Now make Tex use those variables
1677: \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
1678: \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
1679: \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
1680: \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
1681: \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
1682:
1683: % Commands to set those variables.
1684: % For example, this is what @headings on does
1685: % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
1686: % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
1687: % @evenfooting @thisfile||
1688: % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
1689:
1690: \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
1691: \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
1692: \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
1693:
1694: \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
1695: \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
1696: \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
1697:
1698: {\catcode`\@=0 %
1699:
1700: \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
1701: \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
1702: \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
1703:
1704: \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
1705: \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
1706: \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
1707:
1.2 anton 1708: \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
1.1 anton 1709:
1710: \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
1711: \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
1712: \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
1713:
1714: \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
1715: \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
1.2 anton 1716: \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
1717: %
1718: % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
1719: % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
1720: \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
1721: \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
1722: }
1.1 anton 1723:
1.2 anton 1724: \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
1.1 anton 1725: %
1726: }% unbind the catcode of @.
1727:
1728: % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
1729: % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
1730: % @headings off turns them off.
1731: % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
1732: % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
1733: % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
1734: % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
1735: % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
1736: % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
1737:
1738: \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
1739:
1740: \def\HEADINGSoff{
1741: \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
1742: \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
1743: \HEADINGSoff
1744: % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
1745: % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
1746: % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
1747: % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
1748: % edge of all pages.
1749: \def\HEADINGSdouble{
1750: \global\pageno=1
1751: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
1752: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
1753: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
1754: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1755: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
1756: }
1757: \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
1758:
1759: % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
1760: % page number on top right.
1761: \def\HEADINGSsingle{
1762: \global\pageno=1
1763: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
1764: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
1765: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1766: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1767: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
1768: }
1769: \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
1770:
1771: \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
1772: \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
1773: \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
1774: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
1775: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
1776: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
1777: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1778: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
1779: }
1780:
1781: \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
1782: \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
1783: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
1784: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
1785: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1786: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
1787: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
1788: }
1789:
1790: % Subroutines used in generating headings
1.4 ! anton 1791: % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
! 1792: % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
! 1793: % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
! 1794: \ifx\today\undefined
1.3 anton 1795: \def\today{%
1796: \number\day\space
1797: \ifcase\month
1798: \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
1799: \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
1800: \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
1801: \fi
1802: \space\number\year}
1.4 ! anton 1803: \fi
1.1 anton 1804:
1.3 anton 1805: % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
1806: % It generates no output of its own.
1807: \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
1.1 anton 1808: \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
1809: \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
1810:
1811:
1812: \message{tables,}
1813: % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
1814:
1815: % default indentation of table text
1816: \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
1817: % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
1818: \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
1819: % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
1820: \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
1821:
1822: % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
1823: \newdimen\itemmax
1824:
1825: % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
1826: % these defs.
1827: % They also define \itemindex
1828: % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
1829:
1830: \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
1831:
1832: \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
1833:
1834: \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
1835: \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
1836:
1837: \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
1838: \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
1839:
1840: \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
1841: \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
1842:
1843: \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
1844: \itemzzz {#1}}
1845:
1846: \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
1847: \itemzzz {#1}}
1848:
1849: \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
1850: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
1851: \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
1852: \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
1853: \itemindex{#1}%
1854: \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
1855: %
1856: % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
1857: % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
1858: % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
1859: % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
1860: % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
1861: \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
1862: %
1863: % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
1864: % but leave it ragged-right.
1865: \begingroup
1866: \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
1867: \advance\hsize by\tableindent
1868: \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
1869: \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
1870: \endgroup
1871: %
1872: % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
1873: % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
1874: \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
1875: %
1876: % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately
1877: % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
1878: % \baselineskip glue.
1879: \nobreak
1880: \endgroup
1881: \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
1882: \else
1883: % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
1.3 anton 1884: % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
1.1 anton 1885: \noindent
1.3 anton 1886: % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
1887: % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
1888: % eventually be printed.
1889: \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
1890: \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
1891: \unhbox0
1892: \nobreak\kern\dimen0
1893: \endgroup
1894: \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
1.1 anton 1895: \fi
1896: }
1897:
1898: \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
1899: \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
1900: \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
1901: \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
1902: \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
1903: \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
1904:
1.3 anton 1905: % Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
1.1 anton 1906: \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
1907:
1.3 anton 1908: % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
1.1 anton 1909: \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
1910: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
1911: \gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
1912: \tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
1913:
1914: \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
1915: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
1916: \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
1917: \tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
1918: \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
1919: \let\Etable=\relax}}
1920:
1921: \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
1922: {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
1923: \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
1924: \tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
1925: \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
1926: \let\Etable=\relax}}
1927:
1928: \def\dontindex #1{}
1929: \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
1930: \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
1931:
1932: {\obeyspaces %
1933: \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
1934: \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
1935:
1936: \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
1937: \aboveenvbreak %
1938: \begingroup %
1939: \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
1940: \let\itemindex=#1%
1941: \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
1942: \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
1943: \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
1944: \def\itemfont{#2}%
1945: \itemmax=\tableindent %
1946: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
1947: \advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
1948: \exdentamount=\tableindent
1949: \parindent = 0pt
1950: \parskip = \smallskipamount
1951: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
1952: \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
1953: \let\item = \internalBitem %
1954: \let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
1955: \let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
1956: \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
1957: \let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
1958: \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
1959: }
1960:
1961: % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
1962:
1963: \newcount \itemno
1964:
1965: \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
1966:
1967: \def\itemizezzz #1{%
1.3 anton 1968: \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
1.1 anton 1969: \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
1970: }
1971:
1972: \def\itemizey #1#2{%
1973: \aboveenvbreak %
1974: \itemmax=\itemindent %
1975: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
1976: \advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
1977: \exdentamount=\itemindent
1978: \parindent = 0pt %
1979: \parskip = \smallskipamount %
1980: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
1981: \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
1982: \def\itemcontents{#1}%
1983: \let\item=\itemizeitem}
1984:
1985: % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
1986: % These are `.?!:;,'
1987: \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
1988: \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
1989:
1990: % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
1991: % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
1992: %
1993: \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
1994:
1995: % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
1996: % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
1997: % argument is the same as `1'.
1998: %
1999: \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
2000: \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
2001: \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
2002: \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
2003: %
2004: % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
2005: \def\thearg{#1}%
2006: \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
2007: %
2008: % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
2009: % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
2010: % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
2011: % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
2012: % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
2013: \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
2014: \ifx\rest\empty
2015: % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
2016: % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
2017: % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
2018: % not equal to itself.
2019: % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
2020: %
2021: % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
2022: % continuing to look for a <number>.
2023: %
2024: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
2025: \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
2026: \else
2027: % It's a letter.
2028: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
2029: \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
2030: \else
2031: \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
2032: \fi
2033: \fi
2034: \else
2035: % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
2036: \numericenumerate
2037: \fi
2038: }
2039:
2040: % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
2041: % given in \thearg.
2042: %
2043: \def\numericenumerate{%
2044: \itemno = \thearg
2045: \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
2046: }
2047:
2048: % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
2049: \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
2050: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2051: \startenumeration{%
2052: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2053: \ifnum\itemno=0
2054: \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2055: alphabet}%
2056: \fi
2057: \char\lccode\itemno
2058: }%
2059: }
2060:
2061: % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
2062: \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
2063: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2064: \startenumeration{%
2065: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2066: \ifnum\itemno=0
2067: \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2068: alphabet}
2069: \fi
2070: \char\uccode\itemno
2071: }%
2072: }
2073:
2074: % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
2075: % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
2076: % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
2077: %
2078: \def\startenumeration#1{%
2079: \advance\itemno by -1
2080: \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
2081: }
2082:
2083: % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
2084: % to @enumerate.
2085: %
2086: \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
2087: \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
2088: \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2089: \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2090:
2091: % Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
2092:
2093: \def\itemizeitem{%
2094: \advance\itemno by 1
2095: {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
1.2 anton 2096: \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
1.1 anton 2097: {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
2098: \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
2099: \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
2100: \flushcr}
2101:
2102: % @multitable macros
2103: % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
2104: %
2105: % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
2106: % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
2107: % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
2108: % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
2109:
2110: % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
2111:
2112: % To make preamble:
2113: %
1.2 anton 2114: % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
1.1 anton 2115: % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
2116: % @item ...
2117: %
2118: % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
2119: % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
2120: % columns as desired.
2121:
2122:
2123: % Or use a template:
2124: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2125: % @item ...
2126: % using the widest term desired in each column.
2127: %
2128: % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
2129: % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
2130: % will parse correctly, i.e.,
2131: %
1.2 anton 2132: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
1.1 anton 2133: % template}
2134: % Not:
1.2 anton 2135: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
1.1 anton 2136: % {Column 3 template}
2137:
1.2 anton 2138: % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
1.1 anton 2139: % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
2140: % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
2141: % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
2142:
2143: % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
2144: % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
2145:
2146: % Sample multitable:
2147:
2148: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2149: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
1.2 anton 2150: % @item
2151: % first col stuff
2152: % @tab
2153: % second col stuff
2154: % @tab
2155: % third col
2156: % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
1.1 anton 2157: % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
1.2 anton 2158: %
1.1 anton 2159: % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
2160: % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
2161: % @end multitable
2162:
2163: % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
2164: % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
2165: % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
2166: % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
2167: % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
2168: % to baseline.
2169: % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
1.2 anton 2170: %
1.1 anton 2171: \newskip\multitableparskip
2172: \newskip\multitableparindent
2173: \newdimen\multitablecolspace
2174: \newskip\multitablelinespace
2175: \multitableparskip=0pt
2176: \multitableparindent=6pt
2177: \multitablecolspace=12pt
2178: \multitablelinespace=0pt
2179:
2180: % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
1.3 anton 2181: %
1.1 anton 2182: \let\endsetuptable\relax
2183: \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
2184: \let\columnfractions\relax
2185: \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
2186: \newif\ifsetpercent
2187:
1.3 anton 2188: % #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
2189: % is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
2190: % just throw it away). #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
2191: % percent of \hsize for this column.
2192: \def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
2193: \global\advance\colcount by 1
2194: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
2195: \setuptable
2196: }
1.1 anton 2197:
2198: \newcount\colcount
1.3 anton 2199: \def\setuptable#1{%
2200: \def\firstarg{#1}%
2201: \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
2202: \let\go = \relax
1.1 anton 2203: \else
1.3 anton 2204: \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
2205: \global\setpercenttrue
2206: \else
2207: \ifsetpercent
2208: \let\go\pickupwholefraction
2209: \else
2210: \global\advance\colcount by 1
2211: \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
2212: % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
2213: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
2214: \fi
2215: \fi
2216: \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
2217: % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
2218: % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
2219: \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
1.1 anton 2220: \else
1.3 anton 2221: \let\go = \setuptable
1.1 anton 2222: \fi%
1.3 anton 2223: \fi
2224: \go
2225: }
1.1 anton 2226:
1.3 anton 2227: % This used to have \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template line is
2228: % not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just & until we
2229: % encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
2230: % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
2231: \def\tab{&}
1.1 anton 2232:
2233: % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
1.3 anton 2234: %
1.1 anton 2235: \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
2236: \def\dotable#1{\bgroup
1.2 anton 2237: \vskip\parskip
2238: \let\item\crcr
2239: \tolerance=9500
2240: \hbadness=9500
2241: \setmultitablespacing
2242: \parskip=\multitableparskip
2243: \parindent=\multitableparindent
2244: \overfullrule=0pt
2245: \global\colcount=0
2246: \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
2247: %
2248: % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
2249: \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
2250: %
2251: % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
2252: % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
2253: % The table preamble
2254: % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
2255: \everycr{\noalign{%
2256: %
2257: % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
2258: % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
2259: % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem
2260: % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
2261: \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
2262: %
2263: % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
2264: % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
2265: % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
2266: % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
2267: \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
2268: \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
2269: %
2270: % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
2271: % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
2272: % the first one.
1.3 anton 2273: %
1.2 anton 2274: % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
2275: % to the width of each template entry.
1.3 anton 2276: %
1.2 anton 2277: % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
2278: % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
2279: % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
2280: % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
1.3 anton 2281: %
1.2 anton 2282: % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
2283: \rightskip=0pt
2284: \ifnum\colcount=1
2285: % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
2286: \advance\hsize by\leftskip
1.1 anton 2287: \else
1.2 anton 2288: \ifsetpercent \else
2289: % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
2290: % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
2291: \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
2292: \fi
2293: % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
2294: \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
1.1 anton 2295: \fi
1.2 anton 2296: % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
2297: % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
2298: % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
2299: % For example:
2300: % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
2301: % @item @code{#}
2302: % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
2303: % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
2304: % characters.
2305: \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
1.1 anton 2306: }
2307:
2308: \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
2309: % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
2310: % current baselineskip.
2311: \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
1.3 anton 2312: \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
2313: \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
1.1 anton 2314: %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
2315: %% to keep lines equally spaced
2316: \let\multistrut = \strut
1.3 anton 2317: \else
2318: %% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
2319: \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
2320: width0pt\relax} \fi
1.1 anton 2321: %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
1.2 anton 2322: %% table. If not, do nothing.
1.1 anton 2323: %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
2324: \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
2325: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2326: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2327: %% than skip between lines in the table.
2328: \fi%
2329: \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
2330: \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2331: \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2332: %% than skip between lines in the table.
2333: \fi}
2334:
2335:
1.3 anton 2336: \message{conditionals,}
2337: % Prevent errors for section commands.
2338: % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
2339: \def\ignoresections{%
2340: \let\chapter=\relax
2341: \let\unnumbered=\relax
2342: \let\top=\relax
2343: \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
2344: \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
2345: \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
2346: \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
2347: \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
2348: \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
2349: \let\section=\relax
2350: \let\subsec=\relax
2351: \let\subsubsec=\relax
2352: \let\subsection=\relax
2353: \let\subsubsection=\relax
2354: \let\appendix=\relax
2355: \let\appendixsec=\relax
2356: \let\appendixsection=\relax
2357: \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
2358: \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
2359: \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
2360: \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
2361: \let\contents=\relax
2362: \let\smallbook=\relax
2363: \let\titlepage=\relax
2364: }
2365:
2366: % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
2367: % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
2368: % incorrectly.
2369: %
2370: \def\ignoremorecommands{%
2371: \let\defcodeindex = \relax
2372: \let\defcv = \relax
2373: \let\deffn = \relax
2374: \let\deffnx = \relax
2375: \let\defindex = \relax
2376: \let\defivar = \relax
2377: \let\defmac = \relax
2378: \let\defmethod = \relax
2379: \let\defop = \relax
2380: \let\defopt = \relax
2381: \let\defspec = \relax
2382: \let\deftp = \relax
2383: \let\deftypefn = \relax
2384: \let\deftypefun = \relax
2385: \let\deftypeivar = \relax
2386: \let\deftypeop = \relax
2387: \let\deftypevar = \relax
2388: \let\deftypevr = \relax
2389: \let\defun = \relax
2390: \let\defvar = \relax
2391: \let\defvr = \relax
2392: \let\ref = \relax
2393: \let\xref = \relax
2394: \let\printindex = \relax
2395: \let\pxref = \relax
2396: \let\settitle = \relax
2397: \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
2398: \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
2399: \let\everyheading = \relax
2400: \let\evenheading = \relax
2401: \let\oddheading = \relax
2402: \let\everyfooting = \relax
2403: \let\evenfooting = \relax
2404: \let\oddfooting = \relax
2405: \let\headings = \relax
2406: \let\include = \relax
2407: \let\lowersections = \relax
2408: \let\down = \relax
2409: \let\raisesections = \relax
2410: \let\up = \relax
2411: \let\set = \relax
2412: \let\clear = \relax
2413: \let\item = \relax
2414: }
2415:
1.4 ! anton 2416: % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, @ifplaintext, @ifnottex, @html, @menu,
! 2417: % @direntry, and @documentdescription.
1.3 anton 2418: %
2419: \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
1.4 ! anton 2420: \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
1.3 anton 2421: \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
1.4 ! anton 2422: \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
1.3 anton 2423: \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
2424: \def\html{\doignore{html}}
2425: \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
2426: \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
1.4 ! anton 2427: \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
! 2428: \def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
1.3 anton 2429:
2430: % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
2431: % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
2432: \let\dircategory = \comment
2433:
2434: % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
2435: %
2436: \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
2437: % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
2438: \ignoresections
2439: %
2440: % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
2441: % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
2442: % this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match.
2443: \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
2444: %
2445: % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
2446: \catcode32 = 10
2447: %
2448: % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
2449: \catcode`\{ = 9
2450: \catcode`\} = 9
2451: %
2452: % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
2453: \catcode`\@ = 12
2454: %
1.4 ! anton 2455: \def\ignoreword{#1}%
! 2456: \ifx\ignoreword\documentdescriptionword
! 2457: % The c kludge breaks documentdescription, since
! 2458: % `documentdescription' contains a `c'. Means not everything will
! 2459: % be ignored inside @documentdescription, but oh well...
! 2460: \else
! 2461: % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
! 2462: % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
! 2463: % @c @end ifinfo
! 2464: % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
! 2465: % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
! 2466: \catcode`\c = 14
! 2467: \fi
1.3 anton 2468: %
1.4 ! anton 2469: % And now expand the command defined above.
1.3 anton 2470: \doignoretext
2471: }
2472:
2473: % What we do to finish off ignored text.
2474: %
2475: \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
2476:
2477: \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
2478: \def\obstexwarn{%
2479: \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
2480: % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
2481: % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
2482: \immediate\write16{}
2483: \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
2484: \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
2485: \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
2486: \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
2487: \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
2488: \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
2489: \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
2490: \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
2491: \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.}
2492: \immediate\write16{}
2493: \global\warnedobstrue
2494: \fi
2495: }
2496:
2497: % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a
2498: % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
2499: % uncomment the following line:
2500: %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
2501:
2502: % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
2503: % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
2504: %
2505: \def\nestedignore#1{%
2506: \obstexwarn
2507: % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
2508: % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the
2509: % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize
2510: % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
2511: % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
2512: %
2513: \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
2514: % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
2515: \ignoresections
2516: %
2517: % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
2518: % @end command again.
2519: \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
2520: %
2521: % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no
2522: % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
2523: % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
2524: % undefine them.
2525: %
2526: % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
2527: % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
2528: \ignoremorecommands
2529: %
2530: % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
2531: % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use
2532: % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
2533: % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still
2534: % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
2535: % stuff compared to the main input.
2536: %
2537: \nullfont
2538: \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
2539: \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
2540: \let\tensf=\nullfont
1.4 ! anton 2541: % Similarly for index fonts.
1.3 anton 2542: \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
2543: \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
2544: \let\smallsf=\nullfont
1.4 ! anton 2545: % Similarly for smallexample fonts.
! 2546: \let\smallerrm=\nullfont \let\smallerit=\nullfont \let\smallersl=\nullfont
! 2547: \let\smallerbf=\nullfont \let\smallertt=\nullfont \let\smallersc=\nullfont
! 2548: \let\smallersf=\nullfont
1.3 anton 2549: %
2550: % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
2551: \tracinglostchars = 0
2552: %
2553: % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
2554: \frenchspacing
2555: %
2556: % Don't report underfull hboxes.
2557: \hbadness = 10000
2558: %
2559: % Do minimal line-breaking.
2560: \pretolerance = 10000
2561: %
2562: % Do not execute instructions in @tex
2563: \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
2564: % Do not execute macro definitions.
2565: % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
2566: \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
2567: }
2568:
2569: % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
2570: % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
2571: %
2572: % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
2573: % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
2574: % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
2575: % didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
2576: % losing inside @example, for instance.
2577: %
2578: \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
2579: \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
2580: \parsearg\setxxx}
2581: \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
2582: \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
2583: \def\temp{#2}%
2584: \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
2585: \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
2586: \fi
2587: \endgroup
2588: }
2589: % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
2590: % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
2591: % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
2592: \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
2593:
2594: % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
2595: %
2596: \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
2597: \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
2598:
2599: % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
2600: {
2601: \catcode`\_ = \active
2602: %
2603: % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
2604: % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any
2605: % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
2606: \gdef\value{\begingroup
2607: \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
2608: \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
2609: \valuexxx}
2610: }
2611: \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
2612:
2613: % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
2614: % properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones
2615: % whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
2616: % about that. The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
2617: % winds up in the index file. This means that if the variable's value
2618: % contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
2619: % (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
2620: % one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
2621: %
2622: \def\expandablevalue#1{%
2623: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
2624: {[No value for ``#1'']}%
2625: \else
2626: \csname SET#1\endcsname
2627: \fi
2628: }
2629:
2630: % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
2631: % with @set.
2632: %
2633: \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
2634: \def\ifsetxxx #1{%
2635: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
2636: \expandafter\ifsetfail
2637: \else
2638: \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
2639: \fi
2640: }
2641: \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
2642: \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
2643: \defineunmatchedend{ifset}
2644:
2645: % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
2646: % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
2647: %
2648: \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
2649: \def\ifclearxxx #1{%
2650: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
2651: \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
2652: \else
2653: \expandafter\ifclearfail
2654: \fi
2655: }
2656: \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
2657: \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
2658: \defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
2659:
1.4 ! anton 2660: % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
! 2661: % read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make
! 2662: % `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
1.3 anton 2663: %
2664: \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
2665: \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
2666: \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
1.4 ! anton 2667: \def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
1.3 anton 2668: \defineunmatchedend{iftex}
2669: \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
2670: \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
1.4 ! anton 2671: \defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
1.3 anton 2672:
1.4 ! anton 2673: % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (etc.) and end it at
! 2674: % @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
1.3 anton 2675: % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must
2676: % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't
2677: % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
2678: % the @ifset might be nested.)
2679: %
2680: \def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
2681: \edef\temp{%
2682: % Remember the current value of \E#1.
2683: \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
2684: %
2685: % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
2686: \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
2687: }%
2688: \temp
2689: }
2690:
2691: % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
2692: % control sequences after we've constructed them.
2693: %
2694: \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
2695:
2696: % @defininfoenclose.
2697: \let\definfoenclose=\comment
2698:
2699:
1.1 anton 2700: \message{indexing,}
2701: % Index generation facilities
2702:
2703: % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
2704: % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
2705: {\catcode`\@=11
2706: \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
2707:
2708: % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
2709: % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
2710: % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
2711: % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
2712: % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
2713: % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
2714: % for the sake of vms.
1.3 anton 2715: %
2716: \def\newindex#1{%
2717: \iflinks
2718: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
2719: \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
2720: \fi
2721: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
2722: \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
1.1 anton 2723: }
2724:
2725: % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
1.4 ! anton 2726: %
1.1 anton 2727: \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
2728:
2729: % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
1.4 ! anton 2730: %
! 2731: \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
! 2732: %
1.3 anton 2733: \def\newcodeindex#1{%
2734: \iflinks
2735: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
2736: \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
2737: \fi
2738: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
1.4 ! anton 2739: \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
1.1 anton 2740: }
2741:
2742:
2743: % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
2744: % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
1.4 ! anton 2745: %
1.1 anton 2746: % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
2747: % inside @code.
1.4 ! anton 2748: %
! 2749: \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
! 2750: \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
! 2751:
! 2752: % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
! 2753: % #3 the target index (bar).
! 2754: \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
! 2755: % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
! 2756: % closing the target index.
! 2757: \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
! 2758: % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
! 2759: % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
! 2760: \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
! 2761: \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
! 2762: \fi
! 2763: % redefine \fooindfile:
! 2764: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
! 2765: \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
! 2766: % redefine \fooindex:
! 2767: \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
1.1 anton 2768: }
2769:
2770: % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
2771: % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
2772: % and it is "foo", the name of the index.
2773:
2774: % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
2775: % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
2776:
2777: % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
2778: % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
2779:
2780: \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
2781: \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
2782:
2783: % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
2784: \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
2785: \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
2786:
1.4 ! anton 2787: % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
! 2788: % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
! 2789: % laboriously list every single command here.)
! 2790: %
1.1 anton 2791: \def\indexdummies{%
1.3 anton 2792: \def\ { }%
1.4 ! anton 2793: \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in aux files.
! 2794: % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
! 2795: % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
! 2796: % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
! 2797: \let\{ = \mylbrace
! 2798: \let\} = \myrbrace
! 2799: \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
! 2800: \normalturnoffactive
! 2801: %
1.1 anton 2802: % Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
1.4 ! anton 2803: \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
1.1 anton 2804: \def\"{\realbackslash "}%
2805: \def\`{\realbackslash `}%
2806: \def\'{\realbackslash '}%
2807: \def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
2808: \def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
2809: \def\={\realbackslash =}%
2810: \def\b{\realbackslash b}%
2811: \def\c{\realbackslash c}%
2812: \def\d{\realbackslash d}%
2813: \def\u{\realbackslash u}%
2814: \def\v{\realbackslash v}%
2815: \def\H{\realbackslash H}%
1.4 ! anton 2816: \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
1.1 anton 2817: % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
1.4 ! anton 2818: \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
! 2819: \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
! 2820: \def\L{\realbackslash L}%
1.1 anton 2821: \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
2822: \def\O{\realbackslash O}%
1.4 ! anton 2823: \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
! 2824: \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
1.1 anton 2825: \def\l{\realbackslash l}%
1.4 ! anton 2826: \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
! 2827: \def\o{\realbackslash o}%
1.1 anton 2828: \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
1.4 ! anton 2829: %
! 2830: % Although these internals commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
1.1 anton 2831: \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
1.4 ! anton 2832: \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
! 2833: \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
! 2834: \def\less{\realbackslash less}%
1.1 anton 2835: %\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
1.4 ! anton 2836: \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
1.1 anton 2837: \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
1.4 ! anton 2838: \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
1.1 anton 2839: \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
1.4 ! anton 2840: %
! 2841: \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
! 2842: \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
! 2843: \def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
! 2844: \def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
! 2845: \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
! 2846: %
1.1 anton 2847: \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
1.4 ! anton 2848: \def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
! 2849: \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
! 2850: \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
! 2851: \def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
! 2852: \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
1.1 anton 2853: \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
1.4 ! anton 2854: \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
1.3 anton 2855: \def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
1.4 ! anton 2856: \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
! 2857: \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
! 2858: \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
! 2859: \def\math##1{\realbackslash math {##1}}%
1.3 anton 2860: \def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
1.1 anton 2861: \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
1.4 ! anton 2862: \def\strong##1{\realbackslash strong {##1}}%
! 2863: \def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
! 2864: \def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
1.1 anton 2865: \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
1.4 ! anton 2866: \def\w{\realbackslash w }%
! 2867: %
! 2868: % These math commands don't seem likely to be used in index entries.
! 2869: \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
! 2870: \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
! 2871: \def\error{\realbackslash error}%
! 2872: \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
! 2873: \def\point{\realbackslash point}%
! 2874: \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
! 2875: \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
1.3 anton 2876: %
2877: % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
2878: % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
2879: % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
2880: \let\value = \expandablevalue
2881: %
1.1 anton 2882: \unsepspaces
1.3 anton 2883: % Turn off macro expansion
2884: \turnoffmacros
1.1 anton 2885: }
2886:
2887: % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
2888: % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
1.4 ! anton 2889: % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
1.1 anton 2890: {\obeyspaces
2891: \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
2892:
2893: % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
2894: % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
2895: \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
2896: \def\indexdummytex{TeX}
2897: \def\indexdummydots{...}
2898:
2899: \def\indexnofonts{%
1.4 ! anton 2900: \def\@{@}%
! 2901: % how to handle braces?
! 2902: \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
! 2903: %
1.1 anton 2904: \let\,=\indexdummyfont
2905: \let\"=\indexdummyfont
2906: \let\`=\indexdummyfont
2907: \let\'=\indexdummyfont
2908: \let\^=\indexdummyfont
2909: \let\~=\indexdummyfont
2910: \let\==\indexdummyfont
2911: \let\b=\indexdummyfont
2912: \let\c=\indexdummyfont
2913: \let\d=\indexdummyfont
2914: \let\u=\indexdummyfont
2915: \let\v=\indexdummyfont
2916: \let\H=\indexdummyfont
2917: \let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
2918: % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
1.4 ! anton 2919: \def\AA{AA}%
! 2920: \def\AE{AE}%
! 2921: \def\L{L}%
1.1 anton 2922: \def\OE{OE}%
2923: \def\O{O}%
1.4 ! anton 2924: \def\aa{aa}%
! 2925: \def\ae{ae}%
1.1 anton 2926: \def\l{l}%
1.4 ! anton 2927: \def\oe{oe}%
! 2928: \def\o{o}%
1.1 anton 2929: \def\ss{ss}%
1.4 ! anton 2930: %
! 2931: % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
! 2932: % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
! 2933: % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
! 2934: %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
! 2935: %
! 2936: \let\b=\indexdummyfont
! 2937: \let\i=\indexdummyfont
! 2938: \let\r=\indexdummyfont
! 2939: \let\sc=\indexdummyfont
1.1 anton 2940: \let\t=\indexdummyfont
1.4 ! anton 2941: %
! 2942: \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
! 2943: \let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
1.1 anton 2944: \let\cite=\indexdummyfont
2945: \let\code=\indexdummyfont
1.4 ! anton 2946: \let\command=\indexdummyfont
! 2947: \let\dfn=\indexdummyfont
! 2948: \let\dots=\indexdummydots
! 2949: \let\emph=\indexdummyfont
1.3 anton 2950: \let\env=\indexdummyfont
1.1 anton 2951: \let\file=\indexdummyfont
2952: \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
2953: \let\key=\indexdummyfont
1.4 ! anton 2954: \let\math=\indexdummyfont
! 2955: \let\option=\indexdummyfont
! 2956: \let\samp=\indexdummyfont
! 2957: \let\strong=\indexdummyfont
! 2958: \let\uref=\indexdummyfont
! 2959: \let\url=\indexdummyfont
1.1 anton 2960: \let\var=\indexdummyfont
1.4 ! anton 2961: \let\w=\indexdummyfont
1.1 anton 2962: }
2963:
2964: % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
2965: % We must first make another character (@) an escape
2966: % so we do not become unable to do a definition.
2967:
2968: {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
1.3 anton 2969: @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
1.1 anton 2970:
2971: \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
1.3 anton 2972: \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
1.1 anton 2973:
1.3 anton 2974: % For \ifx comparisons.
2975: \def\emptymacro{\empty}
2976:
2977: % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
2978: %
2979: \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
2980:
2981: % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
2982: % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
2983: % \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception
2984: % is with defuns, which call us directly.
2985: %
2986: \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
1.1 anton 2987: % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
2988: \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
2989: \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
2990: \fi
2991: {%
2992: \count255=\lastpenalty
2993: {%
2994: \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
2995: \escapechar=`\\
2996: {%
1.3 anton 2997: \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
1.1 anton 2998: \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
2999: % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
3000: %
1.3 anton 3001: \def\thirdarg{#3}%
3002: %
3003: % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
3004: \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
3005: \let\subentry = \empty
3006: \else
3007: \def\subentry{ #3}%
3008: \fi
3009: %
3010: % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
3011: % off to get the string to sort by.
3012: {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
1.1 anton 3013: %
1.3 anton 3014: % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
1.1 anton 3015: \toks0 = {#2}%
1.3 anton 3016: %
1.4 ! anton 3017: % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
! 3018: % line to write.
1.3 anton 3019: \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
1.4 ! anton 3020: \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0{#3}}%
1.3 anton 3021: \fi
3022: %
1.4 ! anton 3023: % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
! 3024: % the original text, including any font commands. We write
! 3025: % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
! 3026: % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
! 3027: % sorted result.
1.1 anton 3028: \edef\temp{%
3029: \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
3030: \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
3031: }%
1.3 anton 3032: %
3033: % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
3034: % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
3035: % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
3036: % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
3037: % like this:
3038: % @end defun
3039: % @tindex whatever
3040: % @defun ...
3041: % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
3042: % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
3043: % the previous defun.
3044: %
3045: % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
3046: % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
3047: %
3048: % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
3049: %
3050: \iflinks
3051: \ifvmode
3052: \skip0 = \lastskip
3053: \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
3054: \fi
3055: %
3056: \temp % do the write
3057: %
3058: %
3059: \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
3060: \fi
1.1 anton 3061: }%
3062: }%
3063: \penalty\count255
3064: }%
3065: }
3066:
3067: % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
3068: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
3069: % or
3070: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
3071: % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
3072: % containing these kinds of lines:
3073: % \initial {c}
3074: % before the first topic whose initial is c
3075: % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
3076: % for a topic that is used without subtopics
3077: % \primary {topic}
3078: % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
3079: % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
3080: % for each subtopic.
3081:
3082: % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
3083: % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
3084:
3085: \def\findex {\fnindex}
3086: \def\kindex {\kyindex}
3087: \def\cindex {\cpindex}
3088: \def\vindex {\vrindex}
3089: \def\tindex {\tpindex}
3090: \def\pindex {\pgindex}
3091:
3092: \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
3093: {\obeylines %
3094: \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
3095: \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
3096:
3097: % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
3098:
1.2 anton 3099: % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
3100: % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
3101: %
1.1 anton 3102: \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
3103: \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
3104: \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
3105: %
1.3 anton 3106: \smallfonts \rm
1.1 anton 3107: \tolerance = 9500
3108: \indexbreaks
3109: %
3110: % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
1.2 anton 3111: % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
3112: % \initial {@}
3113: % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
3114: % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
3115: \catcode`\@ = 11
1.1 anton 3116: \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
3117: \ifeof 1
3118: % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
3119: % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
3120: % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
3121: % there is some text.
1.3 anton 3122: \putwordIndexNonexistent
1.1 anton 3123: \else
3124: %
3125: % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
3126: % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
3127: % it can discover if there is anything in it.
3128: \read 1 to \temp
3129: \ifeof 1
1.3 anton 3130: \putwordIndexIsEmpty
1.1 anton 3131: \else
1.2 anton 3132: % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
3133: % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
3134: % to make right now.
3135: \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
3136: \catcode`\\ = 0
3137: \escapechar = `\\
3138: \begindoublecolumns
1.1 anton 3139: \input \jobname.#1s
1.2 anton 3140: \enddoublecolumns
1.1 anton 3141: \fi
3142: \fi
3143: \closein 1
3144: \endgroup}
3145:
3146: % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
3147: % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
3148:
1.3 anton 3149: \def\initial#1{{%
3150: % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
3151: \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
3152: %
3153: % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
3154: \removelastskip
3155: %
3156: % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
3157: \penalty -300
3158: %
3159: % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
3160: % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
3161: % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
3162: % we need before each entry, but it's better.
3163: %
3164: % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
3165: \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
3166: \leftline{\secbf #1}%
3167: \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
3168: %
3169: % Do our best not to break after the initial.
3170: \nobreak
3171: }}
1.1 anton 3172:
3173: % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
3174: % flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
3175: % entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
3176: %
1.3 anton 3177: \def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
1.1 anton 3178: %
3179: % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
3180: % affect previous text.
3181: \par
3182: %
3183: % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
3184: \parfillskip = 0in
3185: %
3186: % No extra space above this paragraph.
3187: \parskip = 0in
3188: %
3189: % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
3190: \finalhyphendemerits = 0
3191: %
3192: % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
3193: % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
3194: % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
3195: % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
3196: % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
3197: %
3198: % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
3199: % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
1.3 anton 3200: \hangindent = 2em
1.1 anton 3201: %
3202: % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
3203: % with blank space.
3204: \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
3205: %
1.3 anton 3206: % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
3207: \vskip 0pt plus1pt
3208: %
1.1 anton 3209: % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
3210: % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
3211: \noindent
3212: %
3213: % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
3214: #1%
3215: % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
3216: % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
3217: % cursed by a Unix daemon.
3218: \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
3219: \def\tempb{#2}%
3220: \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
3221: \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
3222: \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
3223: %
3224: % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
3225: % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
3226: % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
3227: \hfil\penalty50
3228: \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
3229: %
3230: % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
3231: % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
3232: % \hbox ensues.
1.3 anton 3233: \ifpdf
3234: \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
3235: \else
3236: \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
3237: \fi
1.1 anton 3238: \fi%
3239: \par
3240: \endgroup}
3241:
3242: % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
3243: \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
3244: \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
3245:
3246: \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
3247:
3248: \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
1.4 ! anton 3249: \def\secondary#1#2{{%
! 3250: \parfillskip=0in
! 3251: \parskip=0in
! 3252: \hangindent=1in
! 3253: \hangafter=1
! 3254: \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
! 3255: \ifpdf
! 3256: \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
! 3257: \else
! 3258: #2
! 3259: \fi
! 3260: \par
1.1 anton 3261: }}
3262:
3263: % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
3264: % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
3265: % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
3266: \catcode`\@=11
3267:
3268: \newbox\partialpage
3269: \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
3270:
3271: \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
3272: % Grab any single-column material above us.
1.3 anton 3273: \output = {%
3274: %
1.2 anton 3275: % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
3276: % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
3277: % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
3278: % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
1.3 anton 3279: % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
3280: % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
3281: % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
3282: \ifvoid\partialpage \else
3283: \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
3284: \fi
1.2 anton 3285: %
1.3 anton 3286: \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
3287: % Unvbox the main output page.
3288: \unvbox\PAGE
3289: \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
3290: }%
3291: }%
3292: \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
1.1 anton 3293: %
1.2 anton 3294: % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
3295: \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
1.1 anton 3296: %
3297: % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
3298: % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
3299: % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
3300: % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
1.2 anton 3301: % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
1.1 anton 3302: %
3303: % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
3304: % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
3305: % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
1.2 anton 3306: % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
3307: % as it did when we hard-coded it.
1.1 anton 3308: %
3309: % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
3310: % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
3311: % been clobbered.
3312: %
3313: \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
3314: \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
3315: \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
3316: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
3317: %
3318: % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
3319: % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
3320: \vsize = 2\vsize
3321: }
1.3 anton 3322:
3323: % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
3324: % the last.
3325: %
1.1 anton 3326: \def\doublecolumnout{%
3327: \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
3328: % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
3329: % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
3330: % previous page.
1.3 anton 3331: \dimen@ = \vsize
3332: \divide\dimen@ by 2
1.4 ! anton 3333: \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
1.3 anton 3334: %
1.2 anton 3335: % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
1.1 anton 3336: \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
3337: \onepageout\pagesofar
1.2 anton 3338: \unvbox255
3339: \penalty\outputpenalty
1.1 anton 3340: }
1.4 ! anton 3341: %
! 3342: % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
! 3343: % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
1.1 anton 3344: \def\pagesofar{%
3345: \unvbox\partialpage
1.3 anton 3346: %
1.1 anton 3347: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
1.3 anton 3348: \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
3349: \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
1.1 anton 3350: }
1.4 ! anton 3351: %
! 3352: % All done with double columns.
1.1 anton 3353: \def\enddoublecolumns{%
1.3 anton 3354: \output = {%
3355: % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
3356: % current page, no automatic page break.
3357: \balancecolumns
3358: %
3359: % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
3360: % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
3361: % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
3362: % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
3363: % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
3364: % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
3365: % the output somewhat more palatable.)
3366: \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
3367: }%
3368: \eject
1.2 anton 3369: \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
3370: %
1.3 anton 3371: % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
3372: % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
3373: % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
3374: % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
1.2 anton 3375: \pagegoal = \vsize
1.1 anton 3376: }
1.4 ! anton 3377: %
! 3378: % Called at the end of the double column material.
1.1 anton 3379: \def\balancecolumns{%
1.3 anton 3380: \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
1.1 anton 3381: \dimen@ = \ht0
3382: \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
3383: \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
1.3 anton 3384: \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
3385: %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
1.1 anton 3386: \splittopskip = \topskip
3387: % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
1.3 anton 3388: {%
3389: \vbadness = 10000
3390: \loop
3391: \global\setbox3 = \copy0
3392: \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
3393: \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
3394: \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
3395: \repeat
3396: }%
3397: %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
1.1 anton 3398: \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
3399: \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
1.3 anton 3400: %
1.1 anton 3401: \pagesofar
3402: }
1.2 anton 3403: \catcode`\@ = \other
1.1 anton 3404:
3405:
3406: \message{sectioning,}
1.3 anton 3407: % Chapters, sections, etc.
1.1 anton 3408:
1.2 anton 3409: \newcount\chapno
3410: \newcount\secno \secno=0
3411: \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
3412: \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
1.1 anton 3413:
3414: % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
1.2 anton 3415: \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
1.3 anton 3416: % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
3417: % We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
3418: % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
3419: \def\appendixletter{%
3420: \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
3421: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
3422: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
3423: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
3424: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
3425: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
3426: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
3427: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
3428: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
3429: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
3430: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
3431: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
3432: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
3433: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
3434: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
3435: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
3436: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
3437: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
3438: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
3439: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
3440: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
3441: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
3442: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
3443: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
3444: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
3445: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
3446: % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
3447: % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
3448: % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
3449: % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
3450: \else\char\the\appendixno
3451: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
3452: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
1.1 anton 3453:
3454: % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
1.3 anton 3455: % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
3456: \def\thischapter{}
3457: \def\thissection{}
1.1 anton 3458:
3459: \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
3460: \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
3461:
3462: % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
3463: \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
3464: \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
3465:
3466: % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
3467: \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
3468: \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
3469:
3470: % Choose a numbered-heading macro
3471: % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
3472: % #2 is text for heading
3473: \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
3474: \ifcase\absseclevel
3475: \chapterzzz{#2}
3476: \or
3477: \seczzz{#2}
3478: \or
3479: \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
3480: \or
3481: \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
3482: \else
3483: \ifnum \absseclevel<0
3484: \chapterzzz{#2}
3485: \else
3486: \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
3487: \fi
3488: \fi
3489: }
3490:
3491: % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
3492: \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
3493: \ifcase\absseclevel
3494: \appendixzzz{#2}
3495: \or
3496: \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
3497: \or
3498: \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
3499: \or
3500: \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
3501: \else
3502: \ifnum \absseclevel<0
3503: \appendixzzz{#2}
3504: \else
3505: \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
3506: \fi
3507: \fi
3508: }
3509:
3510: % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
3511: \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
3512: \ifcase\absseclevel
3513: \unnumberedzzz{#2}
3514: \or
3515: \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
3516: \or
3517: \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
3518: \or
3519: \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
3520: \else
3521: \ifnum \absseclevel<0
3522: \unnumberedzzz{#2}
3523: \else
3524: \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
3525: \fi
3526: \fi
3527: }
3528:
1.3 anton 3529: % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
1.1 anton 3530: \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
3531: \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
3532: \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
1.3 anton 3533: \def\chapterzzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3534: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
1.3 anton 3535: \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
1.1 anton 3536: \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
3537: \gdef\thissection{#1}%
3538: \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
3539: % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
3540: % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
3541: \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
1.2 anton 3542: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.3 anton 3543: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
3544: {\the\chapno}}}%
3545: \temp
3546: \donoderef
1.1 anton 3547: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
3548: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
3549: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
1.3 anton 3550: }
1.1 anton 3551:
3552: \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
3553: \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
1.3 anton 3554: \def\appendixzzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3555: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
1.3 anton 3556: \global\advance \appendixno by 1
3557: \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
1.1 anton 3558: \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
3559: \gdef\thissection{#1}%
3560: \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
3561: \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
1.2 anton 3562: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.4 ! anton 3563: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash appendixentry{\the\toks0}%
! 3564: {\appendixletter}}}%
1.3 anton 3565: \temp
3566: \appendixnoderef
1.1 anton 3567: \global\let\section = \appendixsec
3568: \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
3569: \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
1.3 anton 3570: }
1.1 anton 3571:
3572: % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
3573: \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
3574: \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
3575:
1.3 anton 3576: % @top is like @unnumbered.
1.1 anton 3577: \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
1.3 anton 3578:
1.1 anton 3579: \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
3580: \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
1.3 anton 3581: \def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3582: \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
3583: %
3584: % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
3585: % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
3586: % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
3587: % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
3588: % to be executed, not expanded).
3589: %
3590: % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
3591: % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
3592: % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
1.3 anton 3593: % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
3594: % the toc entries.)
1.1 anton 3595: \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
3596: %
3597: \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
3598: \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
1.2 anton 3599: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.3 anton 3600: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
3601: \temp
3602: \unnumbnoderef
1.1 anton 3603: \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
3604: \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
3605: \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
1.3 anton 3606: }
1.1 anton 3607:
1.3 anton 3608: % Sections.
1.1 anton 3609: \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
3610: \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
1.3 anton 3611: \def\seczzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3612: \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
3613: \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
1.2 anton 3614: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.3 anton 3615: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
3616: {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
3617: \temp
3618: \donoderef
3619: \nobreak
3620: }
1.1 anton 3621:
3622: \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
3623: \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
3624: \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
1.3 anton 3625: \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3626: \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
3627: \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
1.2 anton 3628: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.3 anton 3629: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
3630: {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
3631: \temp
3632: \appendixnoderef
3633: \nobreak
3634: }
1.1 anton 3635:
3636: \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
3637: \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
1.3 anton 3638: \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3639: \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
1.2 anton 3640: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.4 ! anton 3641: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry%
! 3642: {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}}}%
1.3 anton 3643: \temp
3644: \unnumbnoderef
3645: \nobreak
3646: }
1.1 anton 3647:
1.3 anton 3648: % Subsections.
1.1 anton 3649: \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
3650: \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
1.3 anton 3651: \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3652: \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
3653: \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
1.2 anton 3654: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.3 anton 3655: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
3656: {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
3657: \temp
3658: \donoderef
3659: \nobreak
3660: }
1.1 anton 3661:
3662: \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
3663: \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
1.3 anton 3664: \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3665: \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
3666: \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
1.2 anton 3667: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.3 anton 3668: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
3669: {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
3670: \temp
3671: \appendixnoderef
3672: \nobreak
3673: }
1.1 anton 3674:
3675: \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
3676: \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
1.3 anton 3677: \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3678: \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
1.2 anton 3679: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.3 anton 3680: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
1.4 ! anton 3681: {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
1.3 anton 3682: \temp
3683: \unnumbnoderef
3684: \nobreak
3685: }
1.1 anton 3686:
1.3 anton 3687: % Subsubsections.
1.1 anton 3688: \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
3689: \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
1.3 anton 3690: \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3691: \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
3692: \subsubsecheading {#1}
3693: {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
1.2 anton 3694: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.3 anton 3695: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
3696: {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
3697: \temp
3698: \donoderef
3699: \nobreak
3700: }
1.1 anton 3701:
3702: \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
3703: \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
1.3 anton 3704: \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3705: \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
3706: \subsubsecheading {#1}
3707: {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
1.2 anton 3708: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.3 anton 3709: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
3710: {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
3711: \temp
3712: \appendixnoderef
3713: \nobreak
3714: }
1.1 anton 3715:
3716: \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
3717: \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
1.3 anton 3718: \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
1.1 anton 3719: \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
1.2 anton 3720: \toks0 = {#1}%
1.3 anton 3721: \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
1.4 ! anton 3722: {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
1.3 anton 3723: \temp
3724: \unnumbnoderef
3725: \nobreak
3726: }
1.1 anton 3727:
3728: % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
3729: % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
3730: \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
3731: \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
3732: \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
3733: \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
3734: \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
3735:
3736: \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
3737: \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
3738: \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
3739: \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
3740:
3741: \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
3742: \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
3743: \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
3744: \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
3745:
3746: % These macros control what the section commands do, according
3747: % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
3748: % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
3749: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
3750: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
3751: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
3752:
3753: % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
3754:
1.3 anton 3755: % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
1.1 anton 3756: % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
3757: % overlong headings to fold.
3758: % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
3759: % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
3760: % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
3761: % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
3762:
3763:
3764: \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
3765: \def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
3766: {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
3767: {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
3768: \parindent=0pt\raggedright
3769: \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
3770:
3771: \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
3772: \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
3773: {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
3774: \parindent=0pt\raggedright
3775: \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
3776:
3777: % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
3778: \def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
3779: \def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
3780: \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
3781:
3782: % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
3783: % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
3784: % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
3785:
3786: %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
3787: \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
3788:
3789: \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
3790:
3791: %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
3792: % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
3793:
3794: \newskip\chapheadingskip
3795:
3796: \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
3797: \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
3798: \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
3799:
3800: \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
3801:
1.3 anton 3802: \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
1.1 anton 3803: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3804: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
3805: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
3806:
1.3 anton 3807: \def\CHAPPAGon{%
1.1 anton 3808: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3809: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
3810: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
3811: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
3812:
3813: \def\CHAPPAGodd{
3814: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3815: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
3816: \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
3817: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
3818:
3819: \CHAPPAGon
3820:
3821: \def\CHAPFplain{
3822: \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
3823: \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
3824: \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
3825:
3826: % Plain chapter opening.
3827: % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
3828: \def\chfplain#1#2{%
3829: \pchapsepmacro
3830: {%
3831: \chapfonts \rm
3832: \def\chapnum{#2}%
3833: \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
3834: \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
3835: \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
3836: \unhbox0 #1\par}%
3837: }%
3838: \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
3839: \nobreak
3840: }
3841:
3842: % Plain opening for unnumbered.
3843: \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
3844:
3845: % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
3846: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
3847: \def\centerchfplain#1{{%
3848: \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
3849: \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
3850: \leftskip = \rightskip
3851: \parfillskip = 0pt
3852: }%
3853: \chfplain{#1}{}%
3854: }}
3855:
3856: \CHAPFplain % The default
3857:
3858: \def\unnchfopen #1{%
3859: \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
3860: \parindent=0pt\raggedright
1.3 anton 3861: \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
1.1 anton 3862: }
3863:
3864: \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
3865: \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
3866: \par\penalty 5000 %
3867: }
3868:
3869: \def\centerchfopen #1{%
3870: \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
3871: \parindent=0pt
1.3 anton 3872: \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
1.1 anton 3873: }
3874:
3875: \def\CHAPFopen{
3876: \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
3877: \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
3878: \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
3879:
3880:
3881: % Section titles.
3882: \newskip\secheadingskip
3883: \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
3884: \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
3885: \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
3886:
3887: % Subsection titles.
3888: \newskip \subsecheadingskip
3889: \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
3890: \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
3891: \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
3892:
3893: % Subsubsection titles.
3894: \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
3895: \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
3896: \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
3897: \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
3898:
3899:
3900: % Print any size section title.
1.2 anton 3901: %
1.1 anton 3902: % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
3903: % number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
3904: \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
3905: {%
3906: \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
3907: \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
3908: }%
3909: {%
3910: % Switch to the right set of fonts.
3911: \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
3912: %
3913: % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
3914: \def\secnum{#2}%
3915: \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
3916: %
3917: \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
3918: \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
3919: \unhbox0 #3}%
3920: }%
3921: \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
3922: }
3923:
3924:
1.3 anton 3925: \message{toc,}
3926: % Table of contents.
3927: \newwrite\tocfile
3928:
3929: % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
3930: % Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the
3931: % argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
3932: %
3933: % We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
1.4 ! anton 3934: % fixed time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
1.3 anton 3935: %
3936: \newif\iftocfileopened
3937: \def\writetocentry#1{%
3938: \iftocfileopened\else
3939: \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
3940: \global\tocfileopenedtrue
3941: \fi
3942: \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
1.4 ! anton 3943: %
! 3944: % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
! 3945: % will be the target of the links in the table of contents. We can't
! 3946: % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
! 3947: % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
! 3948: % of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
! 3949: % two named `2'.
! 3950: \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
1.3 anton 3951: }
1.1 anton 3952:
3953: \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
1.3 anton 3954: \newcount\savepageno
3955: \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
3956:
3957: % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
3958: % to \tocfile.
3959: %
1.1 anton 3960: \def\startcontents#1{%
3961: % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
3962: % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
3963: % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
3964: % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
3965: \contentsalignmacro
1.3 anton 3966: \immediate\closeout\tocfile
3967: %
1.1 anton 3968: % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
3969: % It is abundantly clear what they are.
3970: \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
1.3 anton 3971: \savepageno = \pageno
1.1 anton 3972: \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
3973: \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
1.2 anton 3974: % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
3975: % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
3976: %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
1.1 anton 3977: \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
3978: \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
1.3 anton 3979: %
3980: % Roman numerals for page numbers.
3981: \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
1.1 anton 3982: }
3983:
3984:
3985: % Normal (long) toc.
1.3 anton 3986: \def\contents{%
3987: \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
3988: \openin 1 \jobname.toc
3989: \ifeof 1 \else
3990: \closein 1
3991: \input \jobname.toc
3992: \fi
3993: \vfill \eject
3994: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
3995: \pdfmakeoutlines
1.1 anton 3996: \endgroup
1.3 anton 3997: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
3998: \pageno = \savepageno
1.1 anton 3999: }
4000:
4001: % And just the chapters.
1.3 anton 4002: \def\summarycontents{%
4003: \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
1.1 anton 4004: %
4005: \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
1.4 ! anton 4006: \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
1.1 anton 4007: \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
4008: % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
4009: \secfonts
4010: \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
4011: \rm
4012: \hyphenpenalty = 10000
4013: \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
4014: \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
1.4 ! anton 4015: \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{}
1.1 anton 4016: \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
1.4 ! anton 4017: \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{}
1.1 anton 4018: \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
1.4 ! anton 4019: \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
1.3 anton 4020: \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4021: \ifeof 1 \else
4022: \closein 1
4023: \input \jobname.toc
4024: \fi
4025: \vfill \eject
4026: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
1.1 anton 4027: \endgroup
1.3 anton 4028: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4029: \pageno = \savepageno
1.1 anton 4030: }
4031: \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
4032:
1.3 anton 4033: \ifpdf
4034: \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
4035: \fi
4036:
1.1 anton 4037: % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
4038: % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
4039: % The last argument is the page number.
4040: % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
4041:
1.4 ! anton 4042: % Chapters, in the main contents.
1.1 anton 4043: \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
1.4 ! anton 4044: %
! 4045: % Chapters, in the short toc.
! 4046: % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
1.1 anton 4047: \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
1.3 anton 4048: \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
1.1 anton 4049: }
4050:
1.4 ! anton 4051: % Appendices, in the main contents.
! 4052: \def\appendixentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{\putwordAppendix{} #2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
! 4053: %
! 4054: % Appendices, in the short toc.
! 4055: \let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
! 4056:
1.1 anton 4057: % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
1.4 ! anton 4058: % The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
1.1 anton 4059: % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
4060: % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
4061: % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
1.3 anton 4062: %
4063: \newdimen\shortappendixwidth
4064: %
1.1 anton 4065: \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
1.4 ! anton 4066: % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
1.1 anton 4067: % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
1.4 ! anton 4068: % But use \hss just in case.
1.1 anton 4069: % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
4070: % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
1.4 ! anton 4071: \dimen0 = 1em
! 4072: \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
1.1 anton 4073: }
4074:
1.4 ! anton 4075: % Unnumbered chapters.
1.1 anton 4076: \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
1.3 anton 4077: \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
1.1 anton 4078:
4079: % Sections.
4080: \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
1.4 ! anton 4081: \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3{\dosecentry{#1}{#3}}
1.1 anton 4082:
4083: % Subsections.
4084: \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
1.4 ! anton 4085: \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
1.1 anton 4086:
4087: % And subsubsections.
4088: \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
4089: \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
1.4 ! anton 4090: \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
1.1 anton 4091:
4092: % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
4093: \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
4094:
4095: % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
4096: % page number.
4097: %
4098: % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
4099: % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
4100: \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
4101: \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
4102: \begingroup
4103: \chapentryfonts
1.3 anton 4104: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
1.1 anton 4105: \endgroup
4106: \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
4107: }
4108:
4109: \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4110: \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
1.3 anton 4111: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
1.1 anton 4112: \endgroup}
4113:
4114: \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4115: \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
1.3 anton 4116: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
1.1 anton 4117: \endgroup}
4118:
4119: \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4120: \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
1.3 anton 4121: \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
1.1 anton 4122: \endgroup}
4123:
4124: % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
4125: % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
4126: % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
4127: % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
4128: \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
4129: \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
1.2 anton 4130: % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is
1.4 ! anton 4131: % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
1.2 anton 4132: % have to do the usual translation tricks.
4133: \entry{#1}{#2}%
1.1 anton 4134: \endgroup}
4135:
4136: % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
4137: \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
4138:
4139: \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4140: \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4141:
4142: \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
4143: \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
4144: \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
4145: \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
4146:
4147:
4148: \message{environments,}
1.3 anton 4149: % @foo ... @end foo.
1.1 anton 4150:
1.4 ! anton 4151: % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
! 4152: %
1.1 anton 4153: % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
4154: % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
1.4 ! anton 4155: %
1.1 anton 4156: \def\point{$\star$}
4157: \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
4158: \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
4159: \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
4160: \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
4161:
1.4 ! anton 4162: % The @error{} command.
1.1 anton 4163: % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
1.4 ! anton 4164: %
! 4165: \newbox\errorbox
! 4166: %
1.1 anton 4167: {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
4168: \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
4169: % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
4170: \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
1.4 ! anton 4171: %
1.1 anton 4172: \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
4173: \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
4174: \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
4175: \vbox{
4176: \hrule height\dimen2
4177: \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
4178: \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
4179: \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
4180: \hrule height\dimen2}
4181: \hfil}
1.4 ! anton 4182: %
1.1 anton 4183: \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
4184:
4185: % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
4186: % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
4187: % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
4188:
4189: \def\tex{\begingroup
1.2 anton 4190: \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
4191: \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
4192: \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
4193: \catcode `\%=14
4194: \catcode 43=12 % plus
4195: \catcode`\"=12
4196: \catcode`\==12
4197: \catcode`\|=12
4198: \catcode`\<=12
4199: \catcode`\>=12
4200: \escapechar=`\\
4201: %
4202: \let\b=\ptexb
4203: \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
4204: \let\c=\ptexc
4205: \let\,=\ptexcomma
4206: \let\.=\ptexdot
4207: \let\dots=\ptexdots
4208: \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
4209: \let\!=\ptexexclam
4210: \let\i=\ptexi
4211: \let\{=\ptexlbrace
1.3 anton 4212: \let\+=\tabalign
1.2 anton 4213: \let\}=\ptexrbrace
4214: \let\*=\ptexstar
4215: \let\t=\ptext
4216: %
4217: \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
4218: \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
4219: \def\@{@}%
1.1 anton 4220: \let\Etex=\endgroup}
4221:
1.4 ! anton 4222: % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
1.1 anton 4223: % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
1.4 ! anton 4224: % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
1.1 anton 4225:
4226: % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
4227: \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
4228:
4229: % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
4230: % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
4231: % have any width.
4232: \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
4233:
4234: % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
4235: % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
4236: % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
4237: % should produce a line of output anyway.
4238: %
4239: {\obeyspaces %
4240: \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
4241:
4242: % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
4243: % for use in \parsearg.
4244: {\sepspaces%
4245: \global\let\obeyedspace= }
4246:
4247: % This space is always present above and below environments.
4248: \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
4249:
4250: % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
4251: % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
4252: % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
4253: % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
4254: %
1.4 ! anton 4255: \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
! 4256: \ifnum\lastpenalty < 10000
! 4257: \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
! 4258: \endgraf
! 4259: \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
! 4260: \removelastskip
! 4261: \penalty-50
! 4262: \vskip\envskipamount
! 4263: \fi
! 4264: \fi
! 4265: }}
1.1 anton 4266:
4267: \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
4268:
4269: % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
4270: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
4271:
1.3 anton 4272: % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
4273: % environment contents.
1.1 anton 4274: \font\circle=lcircle10
4275: \newdimen\circthick
4276: \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
4277: \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
4278: \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
4279: %
4280: \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
4281: \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
4282: \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
4283: \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
4284: \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4285: \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
4286: \hskip\rskip}}
4287: \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4288: \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
4289: \hskip\rskip}}
4290: %
4291: \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
4292:
4293: \long\def\cartouche{%
4294: \begingroup
4295: \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
4296: \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
4297: \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
4298: \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
4299: \cartouter=\hsize
1.3 anton 4300: \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
1.1 anton 4301: % side, and for 6pt waste from
1.3 anton 4302: % each corner char, and rule thickness
1.1 anton 4303: \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
4304: % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
4305: \let\nonarrowing=\comment
4306: \vbox\bgroup
4307: \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
4308: \carttop
4309: \hbox\bgroup
4310: \hskip\lskip
4311: \vrule\kern3pt
4312: \vbox\bgroup
4313: \hsize=\cartinner
4314: \kern3pt
4315: \begingroup
4316: \baselineskip=\normbskip
4317: \lineskip=\normlskip
4318: \parskip=\normpskip
4319: \vskip -\parskip
4320: \def\Ecartouche{%
4321: \endgroup
4322: \kern3pt
4323: \egroup
4324: \kern3pt\vrule
4325: \hskip\rskip
4326: \egroup
4327: \cartbot
4328: \egroup
4329: \endgroup
4330: }}
4331:
4332:
4333: % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
4334: % inside a group.
4335: \def\nonfillstart{%
4336: \aboveenvbreak
4337: \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
4338: \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
4339: \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
4340: \singlespace
4341: \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
4342: \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
4343: \parskip = 0pt
4344: \parindent = 0pt
4345: \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
4346: % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
4347: % at next level down.
4348: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
4349: \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
4350: \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
4351: \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
4352: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
4353: \fi
4354: }
4355:
1.3 anton 4356: % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
4357: % environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
4358: %
4359: % To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
4360: % \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep
4361: % the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
4362: % inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
4363: % the environment.
1.1 anton 4364: %
1.3 anton 4365: \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
1.1 anton 4366:
1.3 anton 4367: % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
1.1 anton 4368: \def\lisp{\begingroup
4369: \nonfillstart
4370: \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
4371: \tt
1.3 anton 4372: \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
4373: \gobble % eat return
1.1 anton 4374: }
4375:
1.3 anton 4376: % @example: Same as @lisp.
1.1 anton 4377: \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
4378:
1.3 anton 4379: % @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
4380: % redefines). We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
4381: % definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
4382: % whatever) command.
4383: %
4384: % This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
4385: % @smalldisplay. Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
4386: %
4387: \def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
4388: \def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
4389: \def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
4390: \def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
4391:
4392: % Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
4393: % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
1.1 anton 4394: \def\smalllispx{\begingroup
1.3 anton 4395: \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
4396: \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
1.4 ! anton 4397: \smallexamplefonts
1.3 anton 4398: \lisp
1.1 anton 4399: }
4400:
1.3 anton 4401: % @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
1.1 anton 4402: %
4403: \def\display{\begingroup
4404: \nonfillstart
4405: \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
4406: \gobble
4407: }
1.4 ! anton 4408: %
1.3 anton 4409: % @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
4410: %
4411: \def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
4412: \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
1.4 ! anton 4413: \smallexamplefonts \rm
1.3 anton 4414: \display
4415: }
4416:
4417: % @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
1.1 anton 4418: %
4419: \def\format{\begingroup
4420: \let\nonarrowing = t
4421: \nonfillstart
4422: \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
4423: \gobble
4424: }
1.4 ! anton 4425: %
1.3 anton 4426: % @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
1.1 anton 4427: %
1.3 anton 4428: \def\smallformatx{\begingroup
4429: \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
1.4 ! anton 4430: \smallexamplefonts \rm
1.3 anton 4431: \format
1.1 anton 4432: }
1.3 anton 4433:
4434: % @flushleft (same as @format).
4435: %
4436: \def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
4437:
4438: % @flushright.
4439: %
1.1 anton 4440: \def\flushright{\begingroup
4441: \let\nonarrowing = t
4442: \nonfillstart
4443: \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
4444: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
1.3 anton 4445: \gobble
4446: }
1.1 anton 4447:
1.4 ! anton 4448:
1.1 anton 4449: % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
4450: % and narrows the margins.
4451: %
4452: \def\quotation{%
4453: \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
4454: {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
4455: \singlespace
4456: \parindent=0pt
4457: % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
4458: % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
4459: \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
4460: %
4461: % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
4462: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
4463: \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
4464: \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
4465: \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
4466: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
4467: \fi
4468: }
4469:
1.3 anton 4470:
1.4 ! anton 4471: % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
! 4472: % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
! 4473: % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
! 4474: % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
! 4475: %
! 4476: % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
! 4477: %
! 4478: % [Knuth] p. 344; only we need to do '@' too
! 4479: \def\dospecials{%
! 4480: \do\ \do\\\do\@\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
! 4481: \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~}
! 4482: %
! 4483: % [Knuth] p. 380
! 4484: \def\uncatcodespecials{%
! 4485: \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
! 4486: %
! 4487: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
! 4488: % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
! 4489: \begingroup
! 4490: \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
! 4491: \endgroup
! 4492: %
! 4493: % Setup for the @verb command.
! 4494: %
! 4495: % Eight spaces for a tab
! 4496: \begingroup
! 4497: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 4498: \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
! 4499: \endgroup
! 4500: %
! 4501: \def\setupverb{%
! 4502: \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
! 4503: \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
! 4504: \catcode`\`=\active
! 4505: \tabeightspaces
! 4506: % Respect line breaks,
! 4507: % print special symbols as themselves, and
! 4508: % make each space count
! 4509: % must do in this order:
! 4510: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
! 4511: }
! 4512:
! 4513: % Setup for the @verbatim environment
! 4514: %
! 4515: % Real tab expansion
! 4516: \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
! 4517: %
! 4518: \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
! 4519: \begingroup
! 4520: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 4521: \gdef\tabexpand{%
! 4522: \catcode`\^^I=\active
! 4523: \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
! 4524: \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
! 4525: \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
! 4526: \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
! 4527: \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
! 4528: \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
! 4529: }%
! 4530: }
! 4531: \endgroup
! 4532: \def\setupverbatim{%
! 4533: % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
! 4534: \tt
! 4535: \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
! 4536: \catcode`\`=\active
! 4537: \tabexpand
! 4538: % Respect line breaks,
! 4539: % print special symbols as themselves, and
! 4540: % make each space count
! 4541: % must do in this order:
! 4542: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
! 4543: \everypar{\starttabbox}%
! 4544: }
! 4545:
! 4546: % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
! 4547: % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
! 4548: % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
! 4549: %
! 4550: % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
! 4551: %
! 4552: % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
! 4553: \begingroup
! 4554: \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
! 4555: \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
! 4556: \endgroup
! 4557: %
! 4558: \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
! 4559: %
! 4560: %
! 4561: % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
! 4562: % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
! 4563: %
! 4564: % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
! 4565: %
! 4566: % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
! 4567: % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
! 4568: % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'
! 4569: %
! 4570: % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
! 4571: %% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
! 4572: %% \begingroup
! 4573: %% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
! 4574: %% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
! 4575: %% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
! 4576: %% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
! 4577: %% |endgroup
! 4578: \begingroup
! 4579: \catcode`\ =\active
! 4580: \gdef\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1\end{verbatim}}
! 4581: \endgroup
! 4582: %
! 4583: \def\verbatim{%
! 4584: \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
! 4585: \begingroup
! 4586: \nonfillstart
! 4587: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
! 4588: \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
! 4589: }
! 4590:
! 4591: % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
! 4592: %
! 4593: % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
! 4594: \def\verbatiminclude{%
! 4595: \begingroup
! 4596: \catcode`\\=12
! 4597: \catcode`~=12
! 4598: \catcode`^=12
! 4599: \catcode`_=12
! 4600: \catcode`|=12
! 4601: \catcode`<=12
! 4602: \catcode`>=12
! 4603: \catcode`+=12
! 4604: \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
! 4605: }
! 4606: \def\setupverbatiminclude{%
! 4607: \begingroup
! 4608: \nonfillstart
! 4609: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
! 4610: \begingroup\setupverbatim
! 4611: }
! 4612: %
! 4613: \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
! 4614: % Restore active chars for included file.
! 4615: \endgroup
! 4616: \begingroup
! 4617: \def\thisfile{#1}%
! 4618: \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
! 4619: \endgroup\nonfillfinish\endgroup
! 4620: }
! 4621:
! 4622: % @copying ... @end copying.
! 4623: % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
! 4624: %
! 4625: \newbox\copyingbox
! 4626: %
! 4627: \def\copying{\begingroup
! 4628: \parindent = 0pt % looks wrong on title page
! 4629: \def\Ecopying{\egroup\endgroup}%
! 4630: \global\setbox\copyingbox = \vbox\bgroup
! 4631: }
! 4632:
! 4633: % @insertcopying.
! 4634: %
! 4635: \def\insertcopying{\unvcopy\copyingbox}
! 4636:
! 4637:
1.1 anton 4638: \message{defuns,}
1.3 anton 4639: % @defun etc.
4640:
4641: % Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
1.1 anton 4642: \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
4643:
4644: \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
4645: \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
4646: \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
4647: \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
4648:
4649: \newcount\parencount
4650: % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
4651: % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
4652: \def\activeparens{%
4653: \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
4654: \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
4655:
4656: % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
4657: \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
4658:
4659: {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
4660:
4661: % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
4662: % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
4663: % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
4664: \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
4665: \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
4666:
4667: \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
4668: \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
4669: % This is used to turn on special parens
4670: % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
4671: \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
4672:
4673: % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
4674: % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
1.2 anton 4675: \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
4676: \global\advance\parencount by 1
4677: }
1.1 anton 4678: %
4679: % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
4680: \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
4681: %
4682: \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
1.2 anton 4683: % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
4684: \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
4685: \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
1.1 anton 4686: % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
4687: \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
4688: %
4689: \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
4690: } % End of definition inside \activeparens
4691: %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
4692: %% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
1.2 anton 4693: \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
4694: \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
1.3 anton 4695: \let\ampnr = \&
1.2 anton 4696: \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
4697: \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
1.1 anton 4698:
1.3 anton 4699: % Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
4700: {
4701: \catcode`& = 13
4702: \global\let& = \ampnr
4703: }
4704:
1.1 anton 4705: % First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
4706: % #1 should be the function name.
4707: % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
4708:
4709: \def\defname #1#2{%
4710: % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
4711: % outside the @def...
4712: \dimen2=\leftskip
4713: \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
1.3 anton 4714: \noindent
1.1 anton 4715: \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
4716: \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
4717: \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
1.3 anton 4718: \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
1.1 anton 4719: % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
4720: % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
4721: % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
4722: {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
4723: % so that \rightline will obey them.
1.3 anton 4724: \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
4725: \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
1.1 anton 4726: % Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
4727: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
4728: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
4729: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
4730: {\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name
4731: }
4732:
4733: % Actually process the body of a definition
4734: % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
4735: % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
4736: % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
4737: % such as \defunheader.
4738:
4739: \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
4740: \medbreak %
4741: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
4742: % so that it will exit this group.
4743: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
4744: \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
4745: \parindent=0in
1.3 anton 4746: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
1.1 anton 4747: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
4748: \begingroup %
4749: \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
4750: \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
4751:
1.3 anton 4752: % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
4753: % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
4754: % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
4755: % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
4756: %
4757: \def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
1.1 anton 4758: \medbreak %
4759: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
4760: % so that it will exit this group.
4761: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
4762: \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
4763: \parindent=0in
1.3 anton 4764: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
1.1 anton 4765: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
4766: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
4767:
1.3 anton 4768: % Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
4769: % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
4770: % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
4771: % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
4772: % #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
4773: % #5 is the method's return type.
4774: %
4775: \def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV
4776: \medbreak
4777: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
4778: \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
4779: \parindent=0in
4780: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
4781: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
4782: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
4783:
4784: % Used for @deftypeop. The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
4785: % extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
4786: % being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'. We have
4787: % to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
4788: % input at hand. Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
4789: % the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
4790: %
4791: \def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV
4792: \medbreak
4793: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
4794: \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
4795: \def#4{##1}%
4796: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
4797: \parindent=0in
4798: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
4799: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
4800: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}}
4801:
1.1 anton 4802: \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
4803: \medbreak %
4804: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
4805: % so that it will exit this group.
4806: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
4807: \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
4808: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
4809: \parindent=0in
1.3 anton 4810: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
1.1 anton 4811: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
4812: \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
4813:
4814: % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
4815: % except that they do not make parens into active characters.
4816: % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
4817:
4818: \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
4819: \medbreak %
4820: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
4821: % so that it will exit this group.
4822: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
4823: \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
4824: \parindent=0in
1.3 anton 4825: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
1.1 anton 4826: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
4827: \begingroup %
4828: \catcode 61=\active %
4829: \obeylines\spacesplit#3}
4830:
4831: % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for
4832: % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
1.2 anton 4833: %
1.1 anton 4834: \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
4835: \begingroup\inENV %
4836: \medbreak %
4837: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
4838: % so that it will exit this group.
4839: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
4840: \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
4841: \parindent=0in
1.3 anton 4842: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
1.1 anton 4843: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
4844: \begingroup\obeylines
4845: }
4846:
4847: \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
4848: \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
4849: \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
4850: }
4851:
4852: % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
4853: % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
4854: % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
4855: % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
4856: %
4857: % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
4858: % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
4859: % won't strip off the braces.
4860: %
4861: \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
4862: \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
4863: \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
4864: }
4865:
4866: % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
1.2 anton 4867: % braces (if any). That's what this does.
4868: %
4869: \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
1.1 anton 4870:
4871: % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
4872: % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
4873: % (which might be empty) the arguments.
1.2 anton 4874: %
1.1 anton 4875: \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
1.2 anton 4876: #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
1.1 anton 4877: }%
4878:
4879: \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
4880: \medbreak %
4881: % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
4882: % so that it will exit this group.
4883: \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
4884: \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
4885: \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
4886: \parindent=0in
1.3 anton 4887: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
1.1 anton 4888: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
4889: \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
4890:
4891: % Split up #2 at the first space token.
4892: % call #1 with two arguments:
4893: % the first is all of #2 before the space token,
4894: % the second is all of #2 after that space token.
4895: % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
4896: % and the second is passed as empty.
4897:
4898: {\obeylines
4899: \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
4900: \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
4901: \ifx\relax #3%
4902: #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
4903:
4904: % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
4905:
4906: % Define @defun.
4907:
4908: % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
4909: % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
4910:
1.3 anton 4911: \def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
1.1 anton 4912: % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
4913: % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
1.3 anton 4914: % Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
4915: {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
1.1 anton 4916: #1%
1.3 anton 4917: {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
1.2 anton 4918: \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
1.1 anton 4919: \interlinepenalty=10000
4920: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
1.3 anton 4921: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
1.1 anton 4922: }
4923:
4924: \def\deftypefunargs #1{%
4925: % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
4926: % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
4927: % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
4928: \boldbraxnoamp
4929: \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
4930: \interlinepenalty=10000
4931: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
1.3 anton 4932: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
1.1 anton 4933: }
4934:
4935: % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
4936:
4937: % @deffn Command forward-char nchars
4938:
4939: \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
4940:
4941: \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
4942: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
4943: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
4944: }
4945:
4946: % @defun == @deffn Function
4947:
4948: \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
4949:
4950: \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
1.3 anton 4951: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
1.1 anton 4952: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
4953: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
4954: }
4955:
4956: % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
4957:
4958: \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
4959:
4960: % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
4961: \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
4962: % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
4963: \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
4964: \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
1.4 ! anton 4965: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
1.1 anton 4966: \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
4967: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
4968: }
4969:
4970: % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
4971:
4972: \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
4973:
1.4 ! anton 4974: % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
1.1 anton 4975: % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
1.4 ! anton 4976: \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
1.1 anton 4977:
4978: % #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
4979: \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
4980: % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
4981: \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
4982: \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
4983: \begingroup
4984: \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
4985: % at least some C++ text from working
1.4 ! anton 4986: \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
1.1 anton 4987: \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
4988: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
4989: }
4990:
4991: % @defmac == @deffn Macro
4992:
4993: \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
4994:
4995: \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
1.3 anton 4996: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
1.1 anton 4997: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
4998: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
4999: }
5000:
5001: % @defspec == @deffn Special Form
5002:
5003: \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
5004:
5005: \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
1.3 anton 5006: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
1.1 anton 5007: \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
5008: \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
5009: }
5010:
1.3 anton 5011: % @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
5012: %
1.1 anton 5013: \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
5014: \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
1.3 anton 5015: %
5016: \def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
5017: \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
5018: \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
5019: \defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
5020: }
1.1 anton 5021:
1.3 anton 5022: % @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
5023: %
5024: \def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
5025: \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
5026: \deftypeopcategory}
5027: %
5028: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
5029: \def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
5030: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
5031: \begingroup
1.4 ! anton 5032: \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
1.3 anton 5033: {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
5034: \deftypefunargs{#4}%
5035: \endgroup
1.1 anton 5036: }
5037:
1.3 anton 5038: % @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
1.2 anton 5039: %
5040: \def\deftypemethod{%
1.3 anton 5041: \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
1.2 anton 5042: %
5043: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
5044: \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
1.3 anton 5045: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
5046: \begingroup
1.4 ! anton 5047: \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
1.3 anton 5048: \deftypefunargs{#4}%
5049: \endgroup
5050: }
5051:
5052: % @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
5053: %
5054: \def\deftypeivar{%
5055: \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
5056: %
5057: % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
5058: \def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
5059: \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
5060: \begingroup
1.4 ! anton 5061: \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
! 5062: {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
1.3 anton 5063: \defvarargs{#3}%
5064: \endgroup
1.2 anton 5065: }
5066:
1.1 anton 5067: % @defmethod == @defop Method
1.3 anton 5068: %
1.1 anton 5069: \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
1.3 anton 5070: %
5071: % #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
5072: \def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
5073: \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
5074: \begingroup
5075: \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
5076: \defunargs{#3}%
5077: \endgroup
1.1 anton 5078: }
5079:
5080: % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
5081:
5082: \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
5083: \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
5084:
5085: \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
1.3 anton 5086: \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
5087: \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
1.1 anton 5088: \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
5089: }
5090:
1.3 anton 5091: % @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
5092: %
1.1 anton 5093: \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
1.3 anton 5094: %
5095: \def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
5096: \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
5097: \begingroup
5098: \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
5099: \defvarargs{#3}%
5100: \endgroup
1.1 anton 5101: }
5102:
1.3 anton 5103: % @defvar
1.1 anton 5104: % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
5105: % This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
5106: % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
5107: \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
5108: \interlinepenalty=10000
1.3 anton 5109: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
1.1 anton 5110:
5111: % @defvr Counter foo-count
5112:
5113: \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
5114:
5115: \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
5116: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
5117:
5118: % @defvar == @defvr Variable
5119:
5120: \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
5121:
5122: \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
1.3 anton 5123: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
1.1 anton 5124: \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
5125: }
5126:
5127: % @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
5128:
5129: \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
5130:
5131: \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
1.3 anton 5132: \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
1.1 anton 5133: \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
5134: }
5135:
5136: % @deftypevar int foobar
5137:
5138: \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
5139:
1.2 anton 5140: % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
5141: % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
1.1 anton 5142: \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
1.2 anton 5143: \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
1.4 ! anton 5144: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
1.1 anton 5145: \interlinepenalty=10000
1.3 anton 5146: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
1.1 anton 5147: \endgroup}
1.2 anton 5148: \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
1.1 anton 5149:
5150: % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
5151:
5152: \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
5153:
1.2 anton 5154: \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
1.4 ! anton 5155: \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
1.1 anton 5156: \interlinepenalty=10000
1.3 anton 5157: \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
1.1 anton 5158: \endgroup}
5159:
5160: % Now define @deftp
5161: % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
5162:
5163: \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
5164:
5165: % @deftp Class window height width ...
5166:
5167: \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
5168:
5169: \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
5170: \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
5171:
1.3 anton 5172: % These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
5173: % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
5174: %
5175: \def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
5176: \def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
5177: \def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
5178: \def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
5179: \def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
5180: \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
5181: \def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
5182: \def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
5183: \def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
5184: \def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
5185: \def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
5186: \def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
5187: \def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
5188: \def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
5189: \def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
5190: \def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
5191: \def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
5192: \def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
5193: \def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
5194:
5195:
5196: \message{macros,}
5197: % @macro.
5198:
5199: % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
5200: % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
5201: \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
5202: \newwrite\macscribble
5203: \def\scanmacro#1{%
5204: \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
5205: % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
5206: \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
5207: % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
5208: \toks0={#1\endinput}%
5209: \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
5210: \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
5211: \immediate\closeout\macscribble
5212: \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
5213: \input \jobname.tmp
5214: \endgroup
5215: }
5216: \else
5217: \def\scanmacro#1{%
5218: \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
5219: % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
5220: \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
5221: \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
5222: \fi
5223:
5224: \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
5225: \newtoks\macname % Macro name
5226: \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
5227: \def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form
5228: % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
5229:
5230: % Utility routines.
5231: % Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
5232: \def\cslet#1#2{%
5233: \expandafter\expandafter
5234: \expandafter\let
5235: \expandafter\expandafter
5236: \csname#1\endcsname
5237: \csname#2\endcsname}
5238:
5239: % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
5240: % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
5241: {\catcode`\@=11
5242: \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
5243: \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
5244: \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
5245: \def\unbrace#1{#1}
5246: \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
5247: }
5248:
5249: % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
5250: {\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
5251: \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
5252: \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
5253: \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
5254: }
5255:
5256: % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
5257: % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
5258: % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
5259:
5260: % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
5261: % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
5262: % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
5263:
5264: \def\macrobodyctxt{%
5265: \catcode`\~=12
5266: \catcode`\^=12
5267: \catcode`\_=12
5268: \catcode`\|=12
5269: \catcode`\<=12
5270: \catcode`\>=12
5271: \catcode`\+=12
5272: \catcode`\{=12
5273: \catcode`\}=12
5274: \catcode`\@=12
5275: \catcode`\^^M=12
5276: \usembodybackslash}
5277:
5278: \def\macroargctxt{%
5279: \catcode`\~=12
5280: \catcode`\^=12
5281: \catcode`\_=12
5282: \catcode`\|=12
5283: \catcode`\<=12
5284: \catcode`\>=12
5285: \catcode`\+=12
5286: \catcode`\@=12
5287: \catcode`\\=12}
5288:
5289: % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
5290: % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
5291: % where N is the macro parameter number.
5292: % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
5293: % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
5294:
5295: {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
5296: @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
5297: @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
5298: }
5299: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
5300:
5301: \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
5302: \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
5303:
5304: \def\macroxxx#1{%
5305: \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
5306: \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
5307: \paramno=0%
5308: \else
5309: \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
5310: \fi
5311: \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
5312: \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
5313: \else
5314: \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
1.4 ! anton 5315: \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
1.3 anton 5316: \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
5317: \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
5318: % Add the macroname to \macrolist
5319: \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
5320: \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
5321: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
5322: \fi
5323: \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
5324: \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
5325: \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
5326: \fi}
5327:
5328: \def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
5329: \def\unmacroxxx#1{%
5330: \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
5331: \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
5332: \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
5333: % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
5334: \begingroup
5335: \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
5336: \def\do##1{%
5337: \def\tempb{##1}%
5338: \ifx\tempa\tempb
5339: % remove this
5340: \else
5341: \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
5342: \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
5343: \fi}%
5344: \def\newmacrolist{}%
5345: % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
5346: \macrolist
5347: \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
5348: \endgroup
5349: \else
5350: \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
5351: \fi
5352: }
5353:
5354: % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
5355: % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
5356: % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
5357: \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
5358: \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
5359: \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
5360: \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
5361:
5362: % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
5363: % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
5364: % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
5365: % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
5366:
5367: % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
5368: % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
5369: % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
5370: % it to # just before using the token list produced.
5371: %
5372: % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
5373: % the macro is used.
5374:
5375: \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
5376: \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
5377: \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
5378: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
5379: \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
5380: \advance\paramno by 1%
5381: \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
5382: {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
5383: \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
5384: \fi\next}
5385:
5386: % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
5387: % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
5388:
5389: \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
5390: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5391: \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
5392: {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5393:
5394: % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
5395: % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
5396: % Much magic with \expandafter here.
5397: % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
5398: % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
5399: \def\defmacro{%
5400: \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
5401: \ifrecursive
5402: \ifcase\paramno
5403: % 0
5404: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5405: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5406: \or % 1
5407: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5408: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5409: \noexpand\braceorline
5410: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5411: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5412: \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5413: \else % many
5414: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5415: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5416: \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5417: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5418: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5419: \expandafter\expandafter
5420: \expandafter\xdef
5421: \expandafter\expandafter
5422: \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5423: \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5424: \fi
5425: \else
5426: \ifcase\paramno
5427: % 0
5428: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5429: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5430: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5431: \or % 1
5432: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5433: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5434: \noexpand\braceorline
5435: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5436: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5437: \egroup
5438: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5439: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5440: \else % many
5441: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5442: \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5443: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5444: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5445: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5446: \expandafter\expandafter
5447: \expandafter\xdef
5448: \expandafter\expandafter
5449: \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5450: \paramlist{%
5451: \egroup
5452: \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5453: \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5454: \fi
5455: \fi}
5456:
5457: \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
1.1 anton 5458:
1.3 anton 5459: % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
5460: % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
5461: % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
5462: % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
5463: \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
5464: \def\braceorlinexxx{%
5465: \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
5466: \expandafter\parsearg
5467: \fi \next}
5468:
5469: % We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
5470: % expanded by \write.
5471: \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
5472: \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
5473:
5474:
5475: % @alias.
5476: % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
5477: % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
5478: \def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
5479: \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
5480: \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
5481: \edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
5482: \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
5483: \expandafter\endgroup\next}
1.1 anton 5484:
5485:
1.3 anton 5486: \message{cross references,}
5487: % @xref etc.
1.1 anton 5488:
1.3 anton 5489: \newwrite\auxfile
5490:
5491: \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
1.1 anton 5492: \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
5493:
1.3 anton 5494: % @inforef is relatively simple.
1.1 anton 5495: \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
5496: \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
5497: node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
5498:
1.3 anton 5499: % @node's job is to define \lastnode.
5500: \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
5501: \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
5502: \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
5503: \let\nwnode=\node
5504: \let\lastnode=\relax
5505:
5506: % The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
5507: \def\donoderef{%
5508: \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
5509: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
5510: {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
5511: \global\let\lastnode=\relax
5512: \fi
5513: }
5514: \def\unnumbnoderef{%
5515: \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
5516: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
5517: \global\let\lastnode=\relax
5518: \fi
5519: }
5520: \def\appendixnoderef{%
5521: \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
5522: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
5523: {Yappendixletterandtype}%
5524: \global\let\lastnode=\relax
5525: \fi
5526: }
5527:
1.1 anton 5528:
1.3 anton 5529: % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
5530: %
5531: \newcount\savesfregister
5532: \gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
5533: \gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
5534: \gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
5535:
5536: % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
5537: % NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT. Called from \foonoderef. We have
5538: % to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
5539: % aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
5540: % first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
5541: %
5542: \def\setref#1#2{{%
5543: \indexdummies
5544: \pdfmkdest{#1}%
5545: \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
5546: \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
5547: \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
5548: }}
5549:
5550: % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
5551: % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
5552: % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
5553: % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
1.1 anton 5554: %
5555: \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5556: \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5557: \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5558: \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
1.3 anton 5559: \unsepspaces
1.1 anton 5560: \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
5561: \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
5562: \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
5563: \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
5564: \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
5565: % No printed node name was explicitly given.
5566: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
5567: % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
5568: \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
5569: \else
5570: % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
5571: % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
1.3 anton 5572: \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
1.1 anton 5573: % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
5574: \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
5575: \else
5576: \ifhavexrefs
5577: % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
5578: \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
5579: \else
5580: % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
5581: \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
5582: \fi%
5583: \fi
5584: \fi
5585: \fi
5586: %
5587: % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
5588: % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
5589: % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
5590: % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
5591: % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
5592: % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
1.3 anton 5593: \ifpdf
5594: \leavevmode
5595: \getfilename{#4}%
1.4 ! anton 5596: {\normalturnoffactive
! 5597: \ifnum\filenamelength>0
! 5598: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
! 5599: goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
! 5600: \else
! 5601: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
! 5602: goto name{#1}%
! 5603: \fi
! 5604: }%
1.3 anton 5605: \linkcolor
5606: \fi
5607: %
1.1 anton 5608: \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
1.3 anton 5609: \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
1.1 anton 5610: \else
5611: % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
5612: % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
5613: % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
5614: % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
5615: % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
1.3 anton 5616: {\normalturnoffactive
5617: % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
5618: % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
5619: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
5620: \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
5621: }%
5622: % [mynode],
5623: [\printednodename],\space
5624: % page 3
1.1 anton 5625: \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
5626: \fi
1.3 anton 5627: \endlink
1.1 anton 5628: \endgroup}
5629:
5630: % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
5631:
1.3 anton 5632: % Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
5633: % and backslash work in node names. (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
5634: \def\dosetq#1#2{%
5635: {\let\folio=0%
5636: \normalturnoffactive
5637: \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
5638: \iflinks
5639: \next
5640: \fi
5641: }%
5642: }
1.1 anton 5643:
5644: % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
5645: % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
5646: % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
5647:
5648: \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
5649:
5650: % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
5651:
5652: \def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
5653:
5654: \def\Ytitle{\thissection}
5655:
5656: \def\Ynothing{}
5657:
5658: \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
5659: \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
5660: \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
5661: \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
5662: \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
5663: \else %
5664: \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
5665: \fi \fi \fi }
5666:
5667: \def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
5668: \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
5669: \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
5670: \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
5671: \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
5672: \else %
5673: \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
5674: \fi \fi \fi }
5675:
5676: \gdef\xreftie{'tie}
5677:
5678: % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
5679: % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
5680: %
5681: \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
5682: \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
5683: \else
5684: \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
5685: \fi
5686:
5687: % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
5688: % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
5689:
5690: \def\refx#1#2{%
5691: \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
5692: % If not defined, say something at least.
1.2 anton 5693: \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
1.3 anton 5694: \iflinks
5695: \ifhavexrefs
5696: \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
5697: \else
5698: \ifwarnedxrefs\else
5699: \global\warnedxrefstrue
5700: \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
5701: \fi
1.1 anton 5702: \fi
5703: \fi
5704: \else
5705: % It's defined, so just use it.
5706: \csname X#1\endcsname
5707: \fi
5708: #2% Output the suffix in any case.
5709: }
5710:
5711: % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
1.3 anton 5712: %
1.2 anton 5713: \def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
5714: % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
5715: \catcode`\\ = 0
5716: \afterassignment\endgroup
5717: \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
5718: }
1.1 anton 5719:
1.2 anton 5720: % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
5721: \def\readauxfile{\begingroup
5722: \catcode`\^^@=\other
5723: \catcode`\^^A=\other
5724: \catcode`\^^B=\other
5725: \catcode`\^^C=\other
5726: \catcode`\^^D=\other
5727: \catcode`\^^E=\other
5728: \catcode`\^^F=\other
5729: \catcode`\^^G=\other
5730: \catcode`\^^H=\other
5731: \catcode`\^^K=\other
5732: \catcode`\^^L=\other
5733: \catcode`\^^N=\other
5734: \catcode`\^^P=\other
5735: \catcode`\^^Q=\other
5736: \catcode`\^^R=\other
5737: \catcode`\^^S=\other
5738: \catcode`\^^T=\other
5739: \catcode`\^^U=\other
5740: \catcode`\^^V=\other
5741: \catcode`\^^W=\other
5742: \catcode`\^^X=\other
5743: \catcode`\^^Z=\other
5744: \catcode`\^^[=\other
5745: \catcode`\^^\=\other
5746: \catcode`\^^]=\other
5747: \catcode`\^^^=\other
5748: \catcode`\^^_=\other
5749: \catcode`\@=\other
5750: \catcode`\^=\other
5751: % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
5752: % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
5753: % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
5754: % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
5755: % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
5756: % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
5757: % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
5758: % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
5759: %
5760: % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
5761: % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
5762: % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
5763: %
5764: \catcode`\~=\other
5765: \catcode`\[=\other
5766: \catcode`\]=\other
5767: \catcode`\"=\other
5768: \catcode`\_=\other
5769: \catcode`\|=\other
5770: \catcode`\<=\other
5771: \catcode`\>=\other
5772: \catcode`\$=\other
5773: \catcode`\#=\other
5774: \catcode`\&=\other
1.3 anton 5775: \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
1.2 anton 5776: % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
5777: {%
5778: \count 1=128
5779: \def\loop{%
5780: \catcode\count 1=\other
5781: \advance\count 1 by 1
5782: \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
5783: }%
1.1 anton 5784: }%
1.2 anton 5785: % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
5786: % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
5787: % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
5788: % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
5789: % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
5790: % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
5791: \catcode`\{=1
5792: \catcode`\}=2
5793: \catcode`\%=\other
5794: \catcode`\'=0
5795: \catcode`\\=\other
5796: %
5797: \openin 1 \jobname.aux
5798: \ifeof 1 \else
5799: \closein 1
5800: \input \jobname.aux
5801: \global\havexrefstrue
5802: \global\warnedobstrue
5803: \fi
5804: % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
5805: \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
1.1 anton 5806: \endgroup}
5807:
5808:
5809: % Footnotes.
5810:
5811: \newcount \footnoteno
5812:
5813: % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
5814: % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
5815: % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
5816: % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
5817: % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
5818: \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
5819:
1.2 anton 5820: % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
1.1 anton 5821: \let\footnotestyle=\comment
5822:
5823: \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
5824:
5825: {\catcode `\@=11
5826: %
5827: % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
5828: \gdef\footnote{%
5829: \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
5830: \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
5831: %
5832: % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
5833: % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
5834: \let\@sf\empty
5835: \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
5836: %
5837: % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
5838: \unskip
5839: \thisfootno\@sf
5840: \footnotezzz
5841: }%
5842:
5843: % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
5844: % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
5845: %
1.2 anton 5846: % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
5847: % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
5848: % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
5849: %
5850: \long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
1.1 anton 5851: % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
5852: % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
5853: % So reset some parameters.
5854: \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
5855: \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
5856: \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
5857: \floatingpenalty\@MM
5858: \leftskip\z@skip
5859: \rightskip\z@skip
5860: \spaceskip\z@skip
5861: \xspaceskip\z@skip
5862: \parindent\defaultparindent
5863: %
1.3 anton 5864: \smallfonts \rm
5865: %
1.4 ! anton 5866: % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
! 5867: % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
! 5868: % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
! 5869: % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
! 5870: \let\noindent = \relax
! 5871: %
! 5872: % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
! 5873: % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
! 5874: \everypar = {\hang}%
1.1 anton 5875: \textindent{\thisfootno}%
5876: %
5877: % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
5878: % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
5879: % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
5880: \footstrut
1.2 anton 5881: \futurelet\next\fo@t
1.1 anton 5882: }
1.2 anton 5883: \def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
5884: \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
5885: \def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
5886: \def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
1.3 anton 5887: \def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
1.1 anton 5888:
5889: }%end \catcode `\@=11
5890:
5891: % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
5892: % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
5893: % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
5894: % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
5895: % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
5896: %
5897: \def\|{%
5898: % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
5899: \leavevmode
5900: %
5901: % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
5902: \vadjust{%
5903: % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
5904: % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
5905: \vskip-\baselineskip
5906: %
5907: % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
5908: % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
5909: \llap{%
5910: %
5911: % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
5912: \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
5913: %
5914: % This is the space between the bar and the text.
5915: \hskip 12pt
5916: }%
5917: }%
5918: }
5919:
5920: % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
5921: % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
5922: % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
5923: %
5924: \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
5925:
1.2 anton 5926: % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
5927: % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
1.3 anton 5928: %
1.2 anton 5929: % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
5930: % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
5931: % undone and the next image would fail.
5932: \openin 1 = epsf.tex
5933: \ifeof 1 \else
5934: \closein 1
1.3 anton 5935: % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
5936: % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
5937: \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
1.2 anton 5938: \input epsf.tex
5939: \fi
5940: %
1.3 anton 5941: % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
1.2 anton 5942: \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
5943: \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
5944: work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
1.3 anton 5945: it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
1.2 anton 5946: %
5947: \def\image#1{%
5948: \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
5949: \ifwarnednoepsf \else
5950: \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
5951: \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
5952: \global\warnednoepsftrue
5953: \fi
5954: \else
1.4 ! anton 5955: \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
1.2 anton 5956: \fi
5957: }
5958: %
5959: % Arguments to @image:
5960: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
5961: % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
1.4 ! anton 5962: % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
! 5963: % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
! 5964: % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
! 5965: \newif\ifimagevmode
! 5966: \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
! 5967: \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
! 5968: \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
! 5969: % If the image is by itself, center it.
! 5970: \ifvmode
! 5971: \imagevmodetrue
! 5972: \nobreak\bigskip
! 5973: % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
! 5974: % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
! 5975: % above and below.
! 5976: \nobreak\vskip\parskip
! 5977: \nobreak
! 5978: \line\bgroup\hss
! 5979: \fi
! 5980: %
! 5981: % Output the image.
1.3 anton 5982: \ifpdf
1.4 ! anton 5983: \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
1.3 anton 5984: \else
5985: % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
5986: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
5987: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
1.4 ! anton 5988: \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
1.3 anton 5989: \fi
1.4 ! anton 5990: %
! 5991: \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image
! 5992: \endgroup}
1.1 anton 5993:
5994:
1.3 anton 5995: \message{localization,}
5996: % and i18n.
5997:
5998: % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
5999: % @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything
6000: % properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation.
6001: % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
6002: %
6003: \def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
6004: \def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
6005: \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
6006: % Read the file if it exists.
6007: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
6008: \ifeof1
6009: \errhelp = \nolanghelp
6010: \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
6011: \let\temp = \relax
6012: \else
6013: \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
6014: \fi
6015: \temp
6016: \endgroup
6017: }
6018: \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
6019: is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory
6020: should work if nowhere else does.}
1.2 anton 6021:
1.1 anton 6022:
1.3 anton 6023: % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
6024: % likely, but for now just recognize it.
6025: \let\documentencoding = \comment
1.1 anton 6026:
6027:
1.3 anton 6028: % Page size parameters.
6029: %
1.1 anton 6030: \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
6031:
6032: \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
6033: \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
6034: \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
6035:
6036: % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
1.3 anton 6037: \vbadness = 10000
6038:
6039: % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
6040: \hbadness = 2000
1.1 anton 6041:
6042: % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
6043: \widowpenalty=10000
6044: \clubpenalty=10000
6045:
6046: % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
6047: % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
6048: % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
1.3 anton 6049: % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
1.1 anton 6050: %
1.3 anton 6051: \def\setemergencystretch{%
6052: \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
6053: % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
6054: \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
6055: \else
6056: \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
6057: \fi
6058: }
6059:
6060: % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
1.4 ! anton 6061: % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip. We also call
! 6062: % \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define \textleading.
! 6063: % The caller should also set \parskip.
1.3 anton 6064: %
6065: \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
6066: \voffset = #3\relax
6067: \topskip = #6\relax
6068: \splittopskip = \topskip
6069: %
6070: \vsize = #1\relax
6071: \advance\vsize by \topskip
6072: \outervsize = \vsize
6073: \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
6074: \pageheight = \vsize
6075: %
6076: \hsize = #2\relax
6077: \outerhsize = \hsize
6078: \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
6079: \pagewidth = \hsize
6080: %
6081: \normaloffset = #4\relax
6082: \bindingoffset = #5\relax
6083: %
1.4 ! anton 6084: \setleading{\textleading}
! 6085: %
1.3 anton 6086: \parindent = \defaultparindent
6087: \setemergencystretch
6088: }
6089:
1.4 ! anton 6090: % Use `small' versions.
! 6091: %
! 6092: \def\smallenvironments{%
! 6093: \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
! 6094: \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
! 6095: \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
! 6096: \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
! 6097: }
! 6098:
1.3 anton 6099: % @letterpaper (the default).
6100: \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6101: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
1.4 ! anton 6102: \textleading = 13.2pt
1.3 anton 6103: %
6104: % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
6105: \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
6106: }}
1.1 anton 6107:
1.3 anton 6108: % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
6109: \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
6110: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
1.4 ! anton 6111: \textleading = 12pt
1.3 anton 6112: %
6113: \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
6114: %
6115: \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
6116: \tolerance = 700
6117: \hfuzz = 1pt
6118: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6119: \deftypemargin = 0pt
6120: \defbodyindent = .5cm
1.4 ! anton 6121: \smallenvironments
1.3 anton 6122: }}
1.1 anton 6123:
6124: % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
1.3 anton 6125: \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6126: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
1.4 ! anton 6127: \textleading = 12pt
1.3 anton 6128: %
6129: \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
6130: %
6131: \tolerance = 700
6132: \hfuzz = 1pt
6133: }}
1.1 anton 6134:
1.4 ! anton 6135: % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
! 6136: % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
! 6137: % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
! 6138: \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
! 6139: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
! 6140: \textleading = 12.5pt
! 6141: %
! 6142: \internalpagesizes{166mm}{120mm}{\voffset}{-8mm}{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
! 6143: %
! 6144: \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
! 6145: \tolerance = 800
! 6146: \hfuzz = 1.2pt
! 6147: \contentsrightmargin = 0mm
! 6148: \deftypemargin = 0pt
! 6149: \defbodyindent = 2mm
! 6150: \tableindent = 12mm
! 6151: %
! 6152: \smallenvironments
! 6153: }}
! 6154:
1.1 anton 6155: % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin
6156: % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
1.3 anton 6157: \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
1.4 ! anton 6158: \textleading = 13.6pt
1.3 anton 6159: %
6160: \afourpaper
6161: \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
6162: %
1.4 ! anton 6163: % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper, apparently,
! 6164: % although this does not entirely make sense.
1.3 anton 6165: \globaldefs = 0
6166: }}
1.1 anton 6167:
6168: % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
1.3 anton 6169: \def\afourwide{%
6170: \afourpaper
1.4 ! anton 6171: \internalpagesizes{6.5in}{9.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
1.3 anton 6172: }
6173:
6174: % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
6175: % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
6176: % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
6177: %
6178: \def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
6179: \def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
6180: \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
6181: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
6182: \globaldefs = 1
6183: %
6184: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
1.4 ! anton 6185: \setleading{\textleading}%
1.3 anton 6186: %
6187: \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
6188: }}
6189:
6190: % Set default to letter.
6191: %
6192: \letterpaper
6193:
6194:
6195: \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
1.1 anton 6196:
6197: % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
6198: \catcode`\"=\other
6199: \catcode`\~=\other
6200: \catcode`\^=\other
6201: \catcode`\_=\other
6202: \catcode`\|=\other
6203: \catcode`\<=\other
6204: \catcode`\>=\other
6205: \catcode`\+=\other
1.3 anton 6206: \catcode`\$=\other
1.1 anton 6207: \def\normaldoublequote{"}
6208: \def\normaltilde{~}
6209: \def\normalcaret{^}
6210: \def\normalunderscore{_}
6211: \def\normalverticalbar{|}
6212: \def\normalless{<}
6213: \def\normalgreater{>}
6214: \def\normalplus{+}
1.4 ! anton 6215: \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
1.1 anton 6216:
6217: % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
6218: % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
6219: % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
6220: %
6221: % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
6222: % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
6223: % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
6224: % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
6225: %
1.3 anton 6226: \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
6227:
6228: % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
6229: % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
6230: % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
6231: % this is not a problem.
6232: \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
1.1 anton 6233:
6234: % Turn off all special characters except @
6235: % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
6236: % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
6237: % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
6238:
6239: \catcode`\"=\active
1.3 anton 6240: \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
1.1 anton 6241: \let"=\activedoublequote
6242: \catcode`\~=\active
1.3 anton 6243: \def~{{\tt\char126}}
1.1 anton 6244: \chardef\hat=`\^
6245: \catcode`\^=\active
6246: \def^{{\tt \hat}}
6247:
6248: \catcode`\_=\active
6249: \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
6250: % Subroutine for the previous macro.
6251: \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
6252:
6253: \catcode`\|=\active
1.3 anton 6254: \def|{{\tt\char124}}
1.1 anton 6255: \chardef \less=`\<
6256: \catcode`\<=\active
6257: \def<{{\tt \less}}
6258: \chardef \gtr=`\>
6259: \catcode`\>=\active
6260: \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
6261: \catcode`\+=\active
6262: \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
1.3 anton 6263: \catcode`\$=\active
1.4 ! anton 6264: \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
1.1 anton 6265: %\catcode 27=\active
6266: %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
6267:
6268: % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
6269: {\catcode`\==\active
6270: \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
6271:
6272: \catcode`+=\active
6273: \catcode`\_=\active
6274:
6275: % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
6276: % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
6277: % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
6278: % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
6279: \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
6280:
6281: \catcode`\@=0
6282:
6283: % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
6284: \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
6285: %{\catcode`\\=\other
6286: %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
6287:
6288: % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
6289: {\catcode`\\=\active
6290: @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
6291:
6292: % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
6293: \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
6294:
6295: % \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q
6296: \catcode`\\=\active
6297:
6298: % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
6299: % even after parsing them.
6300: @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
6301: @let\=@realbackslash
6302: @let~=@normaltilde
6303: @let^=@normalcaret
6304: @let_=@normalunderscore
6305: @let|=@normalverticalbar
6306: @let<=@normalless
6307: @let>=@normalgreater
1.3 anton 6308: @let+=@normalplus
1.4 ! anton 6309: @let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
1.1 anton 6310:
6311: @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
6312: @let\=@normalbackslash
6313: @let~=@normaltilde
6314: @let^=@normalcaret
6315: @let_=@normalunderscore
6316: @let|=@normalverticalbar
6317: @let<=@normalless
6318: @let>=@normalgreater
1.3 anton 6319: @let+=@normalplus
1.4 ! anton 6320: @let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
1.1 anton 6321:
6322: % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
6323: % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
6324: @otherifyactive
6325:
6326: % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
6327: % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
6328: % a backslash.
6329: %
6330: @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
6331: @global@let\ = @eatinput
6332:
6333: % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
6334: % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
6335: % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
6336: % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
6337: % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
6338: %
1.3 anton 6339: @gdef@fixbackslash{%
6340: @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
6341: @catcode`+=@active
6342: @catcode`@_=@active
6343: }
6344:
6345: % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
6346: @escapechar = `@@
1.1 anton 6347:
1.3 anton 6348: % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
6349: @catcode`@& = @other
6350: @catcode`@# = @other
6351: @catcode`@% = @other
1.1 anton 6352:
1.3 anton 6353: @c Set initial fonts.
1.1 anton 6354: @textfonts
6355: @rm
6356:
1.3 anton 6357:
1.1 anton 6358: @c Local variables:
1.3 anton 6359: @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
1.1 anton 6360: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
1.3 anton 6361: @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
6362: @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
6363: @c time-stamp-end: "}"
1.1 anton 6364: @c End:
FreeBSD-CVSweb <freebsd-cvsweb@FreeBSD.org>
![[BACK]](/cvsweb/icons/back.gif){kind=icon}
Return to texinfo.tex CVS log ![[TXT]](/cvsweb/icons/text.gif){kind=icon}
![[DIR]](/cvsweb/icons/dir.gif){kind=icon}
Up to [gforth] / gforth / doc